WO2009081461A1 - Anticounterfeit medium - Google Patents

Anticounterfeit medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009081461A1
WO2009081461A1 PCT/JP2007/074544 JP2007074544W WO2009081461A1 WO 2009081461 A1 WO2009081461 A1 WO 2009081461A1 JP 2007074544 W JP2007074544 W JP 2007074544W WO 2009081461 A1 WO2009081461 A1 WO 2009081461A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mark
convex
color
sheet
base material
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2007/074544
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Megumi Iijima
Makoto Kawamura
Masato Nagai
Hiroki Ohno
Original Assignee
Toppan Forms Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Toppan Forms Co., Ltd. filed Critical Toppan Forms Co., Ltd.
Priority to PCT/JP2007/074544 priority Critical patent/WO2009081461A1/en
Priority to CN2007801019380A priority patent/CN101896362B/en
Publication of WO2009081461A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009081461A1/en
Priority to HK10112276.8A priority patent/HK1146019A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42DBOOKS; BOOK COVERS; LOOSE LEAVES; PRINTED MATTER CHARACTERISED BY IDENTIFICATION OR SECURITY FEATURES; PRINTED MATTER OF SPECIAL FORMAT OR STYLE NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; DEVICES FOR USE THEREWITH AND NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; MOVABLE-STRIP WRITING OR READING APPARATUS
    • B42D25/00Information-bearing cards or sheet-like structures characterised by identification or security features; Manufacture thereof
    • B42D25/30Identification or security features, e.g. for preventing forgery
    • B42D25/324Reliefs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42DBOOKS; BOOK COVERS; LOOSE LEAVES; PRINTED MATTER CHARACTERISED BY IDENTIFICATION OR SECURITY FEATURES; PRINTED MATTER OF SPECIAL FORMAT OR STYLE NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; DEVICES FOR USE THEREWITH AND NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; MOVABLE-STRIP WRITING OR READING APPARATUS
    • B42D25/00Information-bearing cards or sheet-like structures characterised by identification or security features; Manufacture thereof
    • B42D25/20Information-bearing cards or sheet-like structures characterised by identification or security features; Manufacture thereof characterised by a particular use or purpose
    • B42D25/29Securities; Bank notes
    • B42D2033/24
    • B42D2035/20
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/02Viewing or reading apparatus
    • G02B27/06Viewing or reading apparatus with moving picture effect

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an anti-counterfeit medium such as an anti-counterfeit sheet, and more particularly to an anti-counterfeit structure using a latent image.
  • counterfeit crimes have frequently occurred in securities such as prepaid cards, various admission tickets, gift certificates and stock certificates because they are widely distributed and can be exchanged relatively easily.
  • counterfeit products that cannot be easily distinguished from genuine products can be manufactured relatively easily, and countermeasures against counterfeiting are required. Yes.
  • measures against counterfeiting are required not only for the above-mentioned securities but also for banknotes.
  • the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-313161 is a sheet substrate on which a plurality of printed lines are arranged in parallel to the printed lines, and a part thereof extends in a direction perpendicular to the printed lines.
  • a relief line with a raised cross section is provided, and the latent image is raised depending on the viewing direction.
  • the substrate is viewed from the front, all the printed lines are visible.
  • the viewing direction is changed to the direction perpendicular to the printing lines and relief lines, the portion of the printing lines where the relief lines extend is visible behind the extended relief lines. While not possible, the other parts of the printed line remain visible. Thereby, a latent image corresponding to the shape of the relief line can be raised.
  • a plurality of printed lines parallel to the printed lines, a part extends in a direction perpendicular to the printed lines, and the cross-section is raised.
  • the latent image is raised only when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the printed line and the relief line. It is hard to say that it is easy to determine authenticity by image. In particular, when the viewing direction is restricted, there is a possibility that the authenticity determination based on the latent image cannot be performed.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the problems of the conventional techniques as described above, and provides a forgery prevention medium capable of easily performing authenticity determination by a latent image without being limited to the viewing direction.
  • the purpose is to provide.
  • the present invention provides: A display unit configured by combining the first and second color arrangement units and arranging them in a predetermined arrangement; And an embossed portion arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the display portion so that all or part of the first and second color arrangement portions overlap.
  • the first and second color arrangement portions are used when observed from the normal direction of the substrate and when the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the substrate.
  • the visually recognized color changes, thereby enabling authenticity determination.
  • a plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement; A color arrangement portion provided between a side surface of the embossed portion or between the embossed portions.
  • a plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement; A color arrangement portion provided over the entire periphery of the side surface or apex region of the embossed portion.
  • the color visually recognized by the color arrangement portion changes between when observed from the normal direction of the substrate and when the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the substrate. Therefore, authenticity determination is possible.
  • the first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate
  • the second color arrangement unit has a color different from that of the first color arrangement unit, and is provided on the first color arrangement unit at regular intervals by configuring rows and / or columns
  • the embossed part is In a predetermined area of the first color arrangement portion, rows and / or columns are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface.
  • the areas of the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part are different from each other in each of the two regions separated by a center line parallel to the center line, and And a plurality of second convex portions formed at the predetermined period so that the magnitude relationship of the areas is reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the first convex portion.
  • the first color arrangement portion on the surface of the base material is configured with rows and / or columns in a color different from the first color arrangement portion.
  • a plurality of second color arrangement portions provided are recognized.
  • a plurality of first convex portions and second convex portions are formed on the base material, but when the base material is viewed from the front, the convex shape of the first convex portion and the second convex portion is Since it is visually recognized from the top side toward the bottom side, only a plurality of second color arrangement portions constituting rows and / or columns are recognized, and the latent image does not appear to appear.
  • each of the plurality of first convex portions has an area of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion in each of two regions separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface.
  • the plurality of second protrusions are formed differently, and each of the plurality of second protrusions is separated from each other by a center line parallel to the center line of the first protrusions.
  • the size relationship of the areas is formed so as to be reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the plurality of first convex portions.
  • the first convex portion and the second convex portion are regions on the viewing direction side through a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction.
  • the size relationship of the area between the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part is reversed.
  • the first convex portion and the second convex portion have different colors that can be seen depending on the color of the first color arrangement portion and the color of the second color arrangement portion. Alternatively, the latent image formed by the plurality of second protrusions appears to appear.
  • the first and second convex portions are separated from each other in two regions separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface. Since the area of the color arrangement part is different from each other, and the area size relationship is reversed in the region on the same direction side through the center line, it makes an acute angle with the substrate surface. Even when viewed from the direction, the first and second convex portions have different colors that can be seen depending on the colors of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion. As a result, the latent image formed by the plurality of first protrusions or the plurality of second protrusions appears to appear.
  • the first color arrangement unit is provided with a plurality of second color arrangement units having colors different from those of the first color arrangement unit in a row and / or column, and a predetermined region of the first color arrangement unit.
  • a plurality of first convex portions formed by forming rows and / or columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface
  • the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion are different from each other in each of the two regions separated in step, and a plurality of second color arrangement portions are provided in regions other than the predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion.
  • Each of the plurality of second protrusions formed in a row and / or column parallel to the arrangement direction of the color arrangement portion and shifted from the rows and / or columns of the plurality of first protrusions The area of the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part in each of the two regions separated by the center line parallel to the center line of the first convex part Different directions and the size relationship of the areas are reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the plurality of first protrusions, so which direction forms an acute angle with the substrate surface Even if it is visually recognized from the color of the first convex portion and the second convex portion, the colors seen by the color of the first color arrangement portion and the color of the second color arrangement portion are different from each other, The latent images formed by the plurality of first protrusions or the plurality of second protrusions appear to be raised, and the authenticity determination by the latent images can be easily performed without being limited to the viewing direction.
  • the size relationship of the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion on the viewing direction side changes via the center line in each of the first convex portion and the second convex portion. For this reason, the color relationship between the latent image that emerges and the background changes, and it becomes easier to recognize the latent image.
  • the first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate
  • the second color arrangement portion is provided in a matrix shape having a color different from the first color arrangement portion on the first color arrangement portion
  • the embossed part is A row and / or a column is formed in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and the color of the first color arrangement portion is expressed at the top.
  • a first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex parts formed so as to protrude from the substrate surface, In the region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion, a row and / or a column are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of convex portions constituting the first convex portion group, and the top portion is the second portion.
  • a second convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions formed so as to protrude from the surface of the base material so as to include the color arrangement portion.
  • the first color arrangement portion on the surface of the base material is provided with a plurality of first colors arranged in a matrix with a color different from the first color arrangement portion.
  • Two color schemes are recognized.
  • the base material has a plurality of convex portions protruding from the surface of the base material.
  • the base material is observed from the front, the base material is observed from the protruding direction of the convex portions.
  • the color arrangement part is only recognized as a matrix, and the latent image is not visible.
  • the side surfaces of the plurality of protrusions protruding from the substrate surface are projected by the protrusions adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusions. Hidden and invisible, only the top is visible.
  • the color of the first color arrangement portion is expressed at the top portion, and also constitutes the second convex portion group.
  • a second color arrangement portion having a color different from that of the first color arrangement portion is exposed at the top portion.
  • a plurality of second color arrangement portions are provided in a matrix in the first color arrangement portion, and an arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion
  • a first convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions forming rows and / or columns in parallel is formed, and the first convex portion group is configured in a region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion.
  • the 2nd convex part group which consists of a plurality of convex parts which constituted a row and / or a column in parallel with the arrangement direction of a plurality of convex parts to be formed is formed, which direction makes an acute angle to the substrate surface Even when observed from the side surface of the plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface is hidden by the convex portions adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion, and only the top portion is visible Because of the difference between the color of the top of the first convex group and the color of the top of the second convex group Latent image by the first protrusion group or the second protruding portion group becomes visible emerged Te.
  • the first color arrangement unit is provided with a plurality of second color arrangement units having a color different from that of the first color arrangement unit, and a plurality of second color arrangement units in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement unit.
  • a first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions constituting rows and / or columns is formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the color arrangement portions, and the first color arrangement portion is formed in a region other than the predetermined region.
  • the second convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions constituting rows and / or columns is formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of convex portions constituting one convex portion group, the substrate surface Even when observed from any direction that makes an acute angle, the side surfaces of the plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface are hidden by the convex portions adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions and become invisible. , Only the top is visible, the first is not limited to the viewing direction The authenticity discrimination due to the latent image can be easily performed latent image by parts group or the second protrusion group emerged.
  • the embossed portion is composed of a plurality of convex portions formed on a base material having a flat portion so as to protrude in the normal direction of the flat portion,
  • the color scheme is For each of the plurality of convex portions, a plurality of first mark portions provided on the planar portion so as to surround the convex portion, And a second mark portion provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions.
  • the planar portion provided with the first mark portion when observed from the normal direction of the planar portion of the substrate, the planar portion provided with the first mark portion is opposed to the observation direction. Is reflected in the observation direction on the first mark portion provided on the plane portion, and the first mark portion can be clearly seen.
  • the side surface of the convex portion provided with the second mark portion does not face the observation direction, the light from the observation direction is observed on the second mark portion provided on the side surface of the convex portion. In other directions, the light is reflected and dispersed, and the second mark portion can be seen only thinly.
  • the light from the observation direction is reflected in the observation direction on the second mark portion provided on the side surface of the convex portion, so that the second mark portion can be clearly seen.
  • the plane portion provided with the first mark portion does not face the observation direction, light from the observation direction is also emitted in directions other than the observation direction on the first mark portion provided on the plane portion. The light is reflected and dispersed, so that the first mark portion can be seen only thinly. Therefore, if the plurality of second mark portions are provided on a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions so that the predetermined information as a latent image is expressed, the observation direction with respect to the base material is set to the base material.
  • the latent image by the second mark portion When changing from the normal direction of the plane portion, the latent image by the second mark portion appears to appear.
  • the 2nd mark part is provided over the perimeter of the side surface of a convex part, in what direction the observation direction with respect to a base material is from the normal line direction of the plane part of a base material. Even if it is changed, the latent image by the second mark portion appears to appear.
  • the first mark portion provided on the flat surface portion becomes The convex portion surrounded by the first mark portion is hidden by the convex portion adjacent to the observation direction side, so that only the latent image by the second mark portion is easily visible.
  • the second mark part constituting the latent image that emerges when the observation direction is tilted from the normal direction of the flat part of the base material is the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex part formed on the base material. Therefore, the latent image emerges without being limited to the observation direction, and authenticity determination based on the latent image can be easily performed.
  • the embossed portion protrudes from the surface of the base material, and includes a plurality of convex portions formed in a matrix shape
  • the color scheme is A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first height from the surface of the base material of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions; A second mark portion provided at a position having a second height different from the first height from the surface of the base material of the convex portion not provided with the first mark portion among the plurality of convex portions;
  • Have The first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar in shape, and at least one is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion provided on the plurality of convex portions are not obstructed from the observation direction. Therefore, all the first mark portions and the second mark portions are visually recognized.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion are different from each other in height from the substrate surface, they are similar to each other and are observed from the height direction, so that they are recognized as substantially the same shape. Thus, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion, and it is recognized that the mark portions having the same shape are formed side by side.
  • the observation direction is changed to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, and when the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the substrate surface is smaller than a predetermined angle, the heights of the projections are different from each other.
  • the lower mark portion of the convex portion is hidden by the convex portion adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion, thereby being invisible. Only the mark portion having the higher height at the convex portion is visible.
  • a plurality of first mark portions are provided on a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions so that predetermined information serving as a latent image is expressed, a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface When the image is observed from a direction that makes a smaller angle, the latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear.
  • at least one of the first mark portion and the second mark portion that are similar to each other is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the recess, and the plurality of protrusions are arranged in a matrix.
  • the mark part with the lower height in the convex part is adjacent to the observation direction side.
  • the convex portion hides and cannot be seen, and only the mark portion having a higher height in the convex portion is visible, and the latent image by the first mark portion appears to appear.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion when the substrate is observed from the front.
  • the latent image using the first mark portion can be made difficult to recognize.
  • a plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface are provided in a matrix shape, and the first mark portion is provided at a position that is a first height of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions. And a second mark portion is provided at a position having a second height different from the first height from the base material surface on the side surface of the convex portion where the first mark portion is not provided among the plurality of convex portions.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, and at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion.
  • the embossed portion has a first and second convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions formed with a side surface on a base material,
  • the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group have different coloration ratios due to the color arrangement portions on the side surfaces when observed from the same direction.
  • the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group having different coloration ratios on the side surfaces are formed.
  • the side surfaces of these convex portions are not opposed to the observation direction, but the light from the observation direction is reflected and dispersed by the side surfaces of the convex portions in directions other than the observation direction. Therefore, the coloration ratio of the side surfaces of the convex portions is not clearly recognized, and the distinction between the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group is ambiguous. Become.
  • the observation direction When the observation direction is changed from this state to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the observation direction is opposed to the side surfaces of the plurality of convex portions. Then, the light from the observation direction is reflected in the observation direction on the side surface of the convex portion, and the color arrangement ratio on the side surface of the convex portion is clearly visually recognized. Therefore, the difference between the color scheme ratio of the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the color scheme ratio of the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group is clearly visually recognized to constitute the first convex portion group. A convex part and the convex part which comprises the 2nd convex part group will be identified clearly.
  • the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group have different coloration ratios on the side surfaces when observed from the same direction. Even if it is changed in any direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group are clear. Will be identified.
  • the side surface when the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group formed by providing the side surface on the base-material surface and the convex part which comprises the 2nd convex part group are observed from the same direction. Therefore, even if the observation direction is changed to any direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the surface of the base material, the convex portion and the second convex portion constituting the first convex portion group are arranged. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the authenticity without being limited to the observation direction.
  • the embossed portion is composed of a plurality of concave portions formed to be recessed from the substrate surface
  • the color scheme is A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first depth from the surface of the base material of a predetermined recess among the plurality of recesses; A position that is similar to the first mark portion and has a second depth different from the first depth from the surface of the base material of the concave portion in which the first mark portion is not provided among the plurality of concave portions.
  • a second mark portion provided in the At least one of the first mark portion and the second mark portion is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion provided in the plurality of recesses are not obstructed from the observation direction. All the first mark portions and the second mark portions are visually recognized. Although the first mark portion and the second mark portion have different depths from the surface of the base material, they are similar to each other and are observed in the depth direction, so that they have substantially the same shape. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion, and it is recognized that the mark portions having the same shape are formed side by side. From this state, the observation direction is changed to a direction that makes an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface.
  • the deeper mark portion in the recess is hidden by the surface of the base material on the observation direction side of the recess, so that the depth in the recess is reduced. Only the shallower mark is visible. For this reason, if a plurality of first mark portions are provided in a predetermined concave portion among the plurality of concave portions so that predetermined information serving as a latent image is expressed, it is more than a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface. When observed from a direction forming a small angle, the latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, and at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess.
  • the latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear when viewed from any direction that forms an angle smaller than a predetermined angle with respect to the material surface.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion when the substrate is observed from the front.
  • the latent image using the first mark portion can be made difficult to recognize.
  • the first mark portion and the second mark portion constituting the latent image that emerges when observed from any direction that forms an angle smaller than a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface are similar to each other. And since at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess formed in the base material, the latent image emerges without being restricted in the observation direction, and authenticity determination by the latent image is performed. It can be done easily.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X-X ′ shown in FIG. It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X-X ′ shown in FIG. It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 1b shows the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from a direction B in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from a direction B in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 2 is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b. It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 4a It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 4b. It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 4b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 4b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 4b. It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 5b It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 5b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 5b. It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 5b. It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 6b It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 6b. It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 7B.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an action when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 7 is a view of the protrusions constituting the first protrusion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 7 is a view of the protrusions constituting the second protrusion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an action when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 7 is a view of the protrusions constituting the first protrusion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 7 is a view of the
  • FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 10B.
  • FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 10B.
  • FIG. 10B is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image.
  • FIG. 10B shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 11B.
  • FIG. 11B shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image.
  • FIG. 11B shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group.
  • FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 12B.
  • FIG. 12B shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image.
  • FIG. 12B shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group.
  • FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ illustrated in FIG. 13B. It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part provided with the inner mark shown in FIG. 13b. It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the inner mark shown in FIG. 13b is not provided.
  • FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e.
  • FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing light reflection in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows how the outer periphery mark and inner mark look by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 15a.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing light reflection in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing light reflection in the anti-counterfeit structure when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. It is a figure which shows how the outer periphery mark and inner mark look by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 16a.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ illustrated in FIG. 17B. It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the character part mark shown in FIG. 17b was provided. It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the background part mark shown in FIG. 17b was provided.
  • FIG. 18 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e.
  • FIG. 18 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e.
  • FIG. 18 is a view seen from the cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 18 is a view seen from a cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an angle ⁇ 1 of the observation direction with respect to the flat surface when the background mark becomes invisible when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E is changed from the front. It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the character part mark at angle (theta) 1 shown in FIG. 20b.
  • FIG. 20b shows the state which looked at the character part mark at angle (theta) 1 shown in FIG. 20b.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the first convex group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows how the mark looks by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 22a.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the mark by reflection of the light shown in FIG. 22c.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the first convex group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows how the mark looks by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 22a.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the second convex portion
  • FIG. 22 is a view showing how the mark is seen in the forgery prevention structure of the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the first convex group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the recessed part in which the character part mark shown in FIG. 24b was provided. It is a figure which shows the structure of the recessed part in which the background part mark shown in FIG. 24b was provided.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e.
  • FIG. 25 is a view seen from the cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 25 is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction of the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front. It is a figure which shows angle (theta) 1 of the observation direction with respect to a plane part when the background part mark shown in FIG. 27a becomes invisible.
  • FIG. 27b It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the character part mark at angle (theta) 1 shown in FIG. 27b. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure.
  • FIG. 1a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a first embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 1b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 10 shown in FIG. 1a
  • 1c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ shown in FIG. 1b
  • FIG. 1d is a plan view of the convex portion 13 shown in FIG. 1b
  • FIG. 1e is shown in FIG. 1b.
  • Fig. 1f is a perspective view of the convex portion 13 shown in Fig. 1b as viewed from the direction A in Fig. 1g
  • Fig. 1g is a perspective view of the convex portion 14 shown in Fig. 1b. It is the perspective view seen from the direction.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 1 of the present embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 10 in a partial region of a sheet base 2 made of paper.
  • the sheet base material 2 has a flat surface portion 3 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 4 is provided in a partial region of the flat surface portion 3 and a forgery prevention structure 10 is provided in another region. .
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 4.
  • the forgery prevention structure 10 Before the information is printed in the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 2 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary not to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 10.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 10 provided on the sheet base material 2 includes a background color region 12 which is a first color arrangement portion having the same white color as the base color of the flat surface portion 3 of the sheet base material 2 as shown in FIG.
  • a periodic color arrangement region 11 which is a plurality of second color arrangement portions made of black different from the background color region 12 is provided to constitute a display unit.
  • the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 are formed in a matrix by forming rows and columns on the background color region 12 and being provided with a constant period.
  • the plurality of first convex portions 13 that are embossed portions constituting the first convex portion group and the embossed portions constituting the second convex portion group A plurality of second convex portions 14 that are portions are formed. As shown in FIGS. 1c, 1f, and 1g, these convex portions 13 and 14 have a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone. Side surfaces 13a and 14a are formed by being recessed by about 05 to 0.1 mm, and the same surface as the flat portion 3 is the top portions 13b and 14b. The cross-sectional area gradually increases from the top portions 13b and 14b toward the recess direction of the sheet base material, and the bottom portions of the convex portions 13 and 14 have a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less.
  • the first convex portion 13 constituting the first convex portion group is formed in a predetermined region of the background color region 12 so as to express the letter “T” that becomes a latent image by the shape of the first convex portion group. ing.
  • the convex portions 13 are formed in the same cycle as the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11, and the row and column directions for forming the letter “T” are the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Although parallel, the rows and columns are shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 1 c, in one region when separated by a center line parallel to the surface of the sheet substrate 2, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12.
  • the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11, and each of the two regions separated by the center line includes the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12; The areas are different from each other.
  • FIG. 1 c a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when the convex portion 13 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1 b is illustrated, but this center line is parallel to the surface of the sheet base material 2.
  • the convex portion 13 can be arbitrarily set, and the convex portion 13 is configured such that the areas of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 are different from each other in two regions separated by the arbitrarily set center line. It has become.
  • the plurality of convex portions 14 constituting the second convex portion group are formed so as to surround an area where the plurality of convex portions 13 constituting the first convex portion group are formed in the background color region 12. Yes.
  • the convex portions 14 are formed in the same cycle as the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11, and the row and column directions thereof are parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. The columns are shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 1 d, in one region when separated by a center line parallel to the surface of the sheet substrate 2, the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11.
  • the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 are respectively divided into two regions separated by the center line, in which the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12.
  • the areas are different from each other.
  • FIG. 1 d a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when the convex portion 14 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1 b is illustrated, but this center line is parallel to the surface of the sheet base material 2.
  • the convex portion 14 can be arbitrarily set, and the convex portion 14 has different areas of the periodic coloration region 11 and the background color region 12 in each of the two regions separated by the arbitrarily set center line. It has become. Further, the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 14 are also shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 13.
  • the plurality of convex portions 13 and 14 configured in this way are formed by the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 in a region on the same direction side through a center line that is parallel to each other.
  • the area size relationship between the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 is reversed. Specifically, in the upper left region in the figure through the center line of the convex portion 13, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12 as shown in FIG. In the upper left region in the figure through the center line, the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic coloration region 11 as shown in FIG.
  • the area of the background color area 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement area 11 as shown in FIG. 1c, and the lower right area in the figure via the center line of the convex portion 14 In FIG. 1D, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12 as shown in FIG.
  • the forgery prevention structure 10 illustrated in the present embodiment has 100 periodic coloration regions 11 formed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but if the number is increased, The more the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the anti-counterfeit structure 10 can be made finer, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
  • 100 periodic color arrangement regions 11 are printed in black in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix shape in an area where the anti-counterfeit structure 10 of the sheet base material 2 is provided, that is, an area which becomes a white background color area 12.
  • the printing of the periodic color arrangement region 11 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
  • the convex part 13 which comprises a 1st convex part group by pressing an embossing plate from the plane part 3 side of the sheet base material 2 to the area
  • the convex part 14 which comprises is formed.
  • the convex portions 13 constituting the first convex portion group have the same period as that of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 in a predetermined region that forms “T” serving as a latent image among the regions in which the periodic color arrangement regions 11 are printed.
  • the rows and columns are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11.
  • the convex part 14 which comprises a 2nd convex part group surrounds the area
  • parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and shifted with respect to the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 13. Form rows and columns.
  • Such convex portions 13 and 14 are formed of an embossed plate in which the convex portion 13 is disposed between the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and the convex portion 14 is disposed on the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2 and used.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front, and shows how the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is seen.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 10 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the plane portion 3, the anti-counterfeit structure 10 has a white background color region 12 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, since the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 provided in a matrix in the background color region 12 are black, the plurality of matrix periodic color arrangement regions 11 are recognized. At this time, a plurality of convex portions 13 and 14 are formed on the sheet base material 2. When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 is viewed from the front, the bottom portion from the top portions 13b and 14b of the convex portions 13 and 14 is obtained. Since the convex portions 13 and 14 are not easily recognized, the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 are only recognized in a matrix shape, and the latent image “T” does not appear to appear.
  • FIG. 3a is a diagram showing a state of the convex portion 13 when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1b with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g
  • FIG. 3b is shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state of the convex portion 14 when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1B with respect to the illustrated anti-counterfeit sheet 1
  • FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g
  • FIG. 3D is a diagram showing how the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is viewed when viewed from the A direction in 1b
  • FIG. 3D shows the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b.
  • FIG. 3e is a diagram showing the state of the convex portion 14 when viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g.
  • FIG. 3f shows the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. It is a diagram illustrating a forgery prevention structure 10 overall appearance of when observed from the medium B direction.
  • the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 in regions other than the convex portions 13 and 14 are omitted for easy understanding of the operation in this embodiment.
  • the plurality of convex portions 14 are orthogonal to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1b. Since the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 in the region on the viewing direction side when separated by the center line, as shown in FIG. 3a and FIG. And the convex portion 14 have different colors that can be seen depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the color of the background color region 12 on the entire viewing direction side. Specifically, when the convex portion 13 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 12 made of white, so that the color appears dark gray. When the portion 14 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b, the area of the background color region 12 made of white is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black, so that the portion 14 looks light gray.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 10 as a whole is darker than the light gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 14 when viewed from the direction A in FIG. A gray latent image “T” emerges and appears.
  • FIG. 1c in the plurality of convex portions 13, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when viewed from the B direction in FIG.
  • the area of the color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic coloration region 11, and as shown in FIG.
  • the plurality of convex portions 14 are center lines perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the B direction in FIG.
  • the area of the periodic coloration region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12, as shown in FIG. 3d and FIG. Therefore, the colors that can be seen by the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the color of the background color region 12 are different from each other on the entire viewing direction side.
  • the convex portion 13 is viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1B
  • the area of the background color region 12 made of white is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black, and thus appears light gray
  • the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 12 made of white, so that it looks dark gray.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 10 as a whole is lightly formed by the plurality of protrusions 13 in the dark gray background of the plurality of protrusions 14 when viewed from the B direction in FIG. A gray latent image “T” emerges and appears.
  • the convex portions 13 and 14 have arbitrary centers parallel to the plane portion 3.
  • Each of the two regions separated by the line is formed so that the areas of the periodic coloration region 11 and the background color region 12 are different from each other, and the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 have a relationship in size.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is viewed from any direction that makes an acute angle with respect to the flat surface portion 3.
  • the colors that can be seen by the color of the background color area 12 and the color of the periodic color arrangement area 11 are different from each other, and the latent image appears to appear due to the difference. Further, as described above, since the size relationship between the background color region 12 and the periodic coloration region 11 on the viewing direction side changes through the center line in each of the convex portions 13 and 14 depending on the viewing direction, the surface area changes. The relationship between the color of the rising latent image and the background changes, and it becomes easier to recognize the latent image.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 described above When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2 and the periodic color arrangement area 11 provided in a matrix by printing on the sheet base material 2 are copied.
  • the convex portions 13 and 14 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the viewing direction of the copy is changed, the latent image formed by the first convex portion group composed of the plurality of convex portions 13 does not appear, thereby enabling authenticity determination. Become.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 1 of this embodiment when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 1 of this embodiment, when the viewing direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 3 of the sheet base material 2 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 13 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is true or false without being limited to the viewing direction.
  • the viewing direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 there may be a case where there is not much difference in color between the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 depending on the color of the background color region 12 and the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11. Since the direction is partial, it will not lose its anti-counterfeit function.
  • the convex parts 13 and 14 are formed by denting the plane part 3 of the sheet
  • FIG. 4a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as another embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 4b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 110 shown in FIG. 4a
  • 4c is a plan view of the protrusion 113 shown in FIG. 4b
  • FIG. 4d is a plan view of the protrusion 114 shown in FIG. 4b
  • FIG. 4e is a protrusion shown in FIG. 4b
  • 4f is a perspective view of the portion 113 as viewed from the direction A in the drawing
  • FIG. 4f is a perspective view of the convex portion 114 shown in FIG. 4b as viewed from the direction A in the drawing.
  • a black background color region 112 is provided in the region that becomes the forgery prevention structure 110 of the sheet base material 102, as shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g.
  • the only difference is that the white periodic coloration region 111 is provided in a matrix in the background color region 112. That is, the color of the background color area 112 and the color of the periodic color arrangement area 111 are reversed with respect to those shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g.
  • the periodic image area 111 provided in a matrix on the black background color area 112 is recognized as white, and the latent image “T "Is not recognized.
  • the respective visual recognition direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 113, 114 that is, the side surfaces 113a, 114a on the A side in FIG. Only the top portions 113b and 114b are visible. Then, as shown in FIG.
  • the colors that are visible depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 111 and the color of the background color region 112 are different from each other on the entire viewing direction side.
  • the area of the periodic color arrangement region 111 made of white is larger than the area of the background color region 112 made of black, and thus appears light gray
  • the portion 114 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 4B
  • the area of the background color region 112 made of black is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 111 made of white, so that the portion 114 looks dark gray.
  • a light gray latent image “T” formed by the plurality of protrusions 113 in a dark gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 114. Appears to appear.
  • FIG. 5a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a third embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 5b is a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 210 shown in FIG. 5a
  • 5c is a plan view of the convex portion 213 shown in FIG. 5b
  • FIG. 5d is a plan view of the convex portion 214 shown in FIG. 5b
  • FIG. 5e is shown in FIG. 5b
  • FIG. 5F is a perspective view of the convex portion 213 viewed from the A direction in the drawing
  • FIG. 5F is a perspective view of the convex portion 214 shown in FIG.
  • the size of the periodic color arrangement region 211 provided in a matrix on the sheet base material 202 is different from that shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g. Only the points smaller than the tops 213b and 214b of 214 are different.
  • the periodic color arrangement region 211 provided in a matrix on the white background color region 212 is recognized as black, and the latent image “T "Is not recognized.
  • the visual recognition direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 201 is changed from the front to, for example, the A direction in FIG. 5b, the visual recognition direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 213 and 214, that is, the side surfaces 213a and 214a on the A side in FIG. Only the tops 213b and 214b become visible. Then, as shown in FIG.
  • the visible colors are different depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 211 and the color of the background color region 212.
  • the area of the periodic color arrangement region 211 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 212 made of white, and thus appears dark gray
  • the portion 214 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 5b, the periodic coloration region 211 in which the region on the viewing direction side includes only the background color region 212 that is white through the center line, and a part of the top portion 214b is black. It will appear light gray for some reason.
  • FIG. 6a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is the fourth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 6b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 310 shown in FIG. 6a
  • 6c is a plan view of the convex portion 313 shown in FIG. 6b
  • FIG. 6d is a plan view of the convex portion 314 shown in FIG. 6b
  • FIG. 6e is shown in FIG. 6b.
  • FIG. 6F is a perspective view of the convex portion 313 viewed from the A direction in the drawing
  • FIG. 6F is a perspective view of the convex portion 314 shown in FIG.
  • a black background color region 312 is provided in the region of the sheet base material 302 where the anti-counterfeit structure 310 is provided.
  • the white periodic color arrangement region 311 is provided in a matrix in the background color region 312. That is, the color of the background color region 312 and the color of the periodic color arrangement region 311 are inverted with respect to those shown in FIGS. 5a to 5f.
  • the periodic image area 311 provided in a matrix on the black background color area 312 is recognized only in white and the latent image “T "Is not recognized.
  • the visible colors differ depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 311 and the color of the background color region 312.
  • the area of the periodic color arrangement region 311 made of white is larger than the area of the background color region 312 made of black, and thus appears light gray and convex.
  • the portion on the viewing direction side includes only the background color region 312 which is black via the center line, and the top portion 314b is a periodic coloration region 311 which is white.
  • the periodic color arrangement regions 11, 111, 211, 311 are divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided regions are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 10,110,210,310, it also becomes possible to perform authenticity determination by it.
  • FIG. 7a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a fifth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 7b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 410 shown in FIG. 7a
  • 7c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 7b
  • FIG. 7d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 7b
  • FIG. 7e represents a latent image.
  • FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group
  • FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 401 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 410 in a partial region of a sheet base material 402 made of paper.
  • the sheet base material 402 has a flat surface portion 403 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 404 is provided in a part of the flat surface portion 403 and a forgery prevention structure 410 is provided in another region.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 401 configured in this way is used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 404.
  • the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402 it may be possible to print a background pattern on the sheet base material 402 as a pre-print or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the latent image from the forgery prevention structure 410 from being difficult to see.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 410 provided on the sheet base material 402 has a background color region 412 which is a first color arrangement portion having the same white color as the base color of the flat surface portion 403 of the sheet base material 402.
  • a plurality of mark portions 411 which are a second color arrangement portion made of black different from the background color region 412 are provided in a matrix form to constitute a display portion.
  • a plurality of convex portions 413 which are embossed portions constituting the first convex portion group and a plurality of embossed portions constituting the second convex portion group.
  • the convex portion 414 is formed. As shown in FIGS.
  • these convex portions 413 and 414 have a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, and are 0.05 to 0.05 from the surface of the sheet base material 402 in the normal direction of the flat surface portion 403. It protrudes about 0.1 mm, and the boundary part with the flat part 403 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. On the opposite side of the boundary portion, apexes 413b and 414b parallel to the flat surface portion 403 are formed.
  • the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group are parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of mark portions 411 so as to express the letter “T” that becomes a latent image by the shape of the first convex portion group.
  • a row and a column are formed and formed in a predetermined region of the background color region 412, each of which is formed between a plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix.
  • the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group surround the region where the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group are formed in the background color region 412. It is formed by forming rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the convex portions 413, each of which is a mark provided in a region other than the predetermined region among the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix shape. It is formed on the part 411. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7 f, the top portion 414 b and the side surface 414 a include the mark portion 411.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 410 illustrated in this embodiment has 100 mark portions 411 formed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix shape for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but the number thereof should be increased. As a result, the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the forgery prevention structure 410 can be made finer, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
  • 100 mark portions 411 are printed in black in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix shape in a region where the anti-counterfeit structure 410 of the sheet base material 402 is provided, that is, a region which becomes a white background color region 412.
  • the mark portion 411 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
  • a convex portion 413 constituting the first convex portion group and a convex portion 414 constituting the second convex portion group are formed in the region where the mark portion 411 is printed using an embossed plate.
  • the convex portion 413 is formed between a plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix in a predetermined region that forms “T” as a latent image in the region where the mark portion 411 is printed.
  • 414 is formed on the mark portion 411 provided in a region other than the predetermined region among the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402 and used.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front, and shows how the anti-counterfeit structure 410 is seen.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 410 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 403, the anti-counterfeit structure 410 has a white background color region 412 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, since the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix in the background color region 412 are black, the plurality of mark portions 411 in the matrix shape are recognized. At this time, a plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 protruding from the flat surface portion 403 are formed on the sheet base material 402. When the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is observed from the front, the protruding portions 413 and 414 protrude.
  • FIG. 9A is a view of the convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front.
  • 9b is a view of the convex portions 14 constituting the second convex portion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 9c to FIG. 9f are views showing how the anti-counterfeit structure 410 appears in the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • the white color of the background color region 412 is the top portion 413b.
  • region 412 is represented by the top part 414b. I'm out.
  • the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to, for example, the lower side in FIG. 7a, and the side surfaces 413a and 414a of the plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 413 and 414.
  • the convex portions 413 and 414 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 413b and 414b are visible, depending on the color of the top portion 413b of the convex portion 413 and the top portion 414b of the convex portion 414, FIG.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 appears to appear white.
  • a plurality of mark portions 411 are provided in a matrix in the background color region 412, and a plurality of mark portions 411 are provided in a predetermined region of the background color region 412.
  • a predetermined region in the background color area 412 is formed.
  • a second projection is formed of a plurality of projections 414 surrounding the latent image “T” by forming rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of projections 413 constituting the first projection group.
  • a convex group is formed. Therefore, the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group and the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group are in a substantially matrix shape including rows and columns. Even when observed from any direction that forms an acute angle, the side surfaces 413a and 414a of the plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 are hidden by the convex portions 413 and 414 adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 413 and 414.
  • the first convex portion group formed by a plurality of convex portions 413 is formed.
  • the latent image “T” appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 9e, and when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to the left side in FIG. 7a, the first composed of a plurality of convex portions 413 is formed.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the convex portion group appears to appear.
  • the side surface 414a of the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group can be visually recognized at the convex portion 414 constituting the row closest to the observation direction.
  • the number of the convex portions 413 and 414 is large, or the line width of the latent image formed by the convex portions 413 appears on the side surface 414a of the convex portion 414 constituting the row in the foremost direction in the observation direction. It is only necessary to recognize that the mark portion 411 is unrelated to the latent image by being thicker than the line width of the mark portion 411 or the like.
  • the convex portion 413 that forms the latent image is arranged in a matrix.
  • it may be provided between the mark portions 411 separated from the periphery.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 401 described above When the forgery prevention sheet 401 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402 and the mark portions 411 provided in a matrix by printing on the sheet base material 402 are copied. The projections 413 and 414 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image formed by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 does not appear, and thus it is possible to perform authenticity determination. Become.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 401 of the present embodiment when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 401 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 403 of the sheet base material 402 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is true or false without being limited to the observation direction.
  • FIG. 10a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a sixth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 10b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 510 shown in FIG. 10a
  • 10c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 10b
  • FIG. 10d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 10b
  • FIG. 10e represents a latent image.
  • FIG. 10F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 514 constituting the second convex portion group.
  • FIG. 10F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 513 constituting the first convex portion group.
  • a background color region 512 in black is provided in the region which becomes the forgery prevention structure 510 of the sheet base material 502 in contrast to the one shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • white mark portions 511 are provided in a matrix in the color region 512. That is, the color of the background color region 512 and the color of the mark portion 511 are inverted with respect to those shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
  • the latent image “T” when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 511 provided in a matrix in the black background color region 512 in white. Is not recognized. And if the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 501 is changed from the front, the side surfaces 513a and 514a of the plurality of convex portions 513 and 514 protruding from the flat portion 503 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 513 and 514. The convex portions 513 and 514 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 513b and 514b are visible.
  • the latent image “T” constituted by the shape of the first convex portion group consisting of 513 appears to appear in black.
  • FIG. 11a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a seventh embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 11b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 610 shown in FIG. 11a
  • 11c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 11b
  • FIG. 11d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 11b
  • FIG. 11e represents a latent image.
  • FIG. 11F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 613 constituting the second convex portion group
  • FIG. 11F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 613 constituting the first convex portion group.
  • the size of the mark portions 611 provided in a matrix on the sheet base material 602 is larger than that shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. Only the points smaller than 614b are different.
  • the latent image “T” when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 611 provided in a matrix in the white background color region 612 in black. Is not recognized. And if the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 601 is changed from the front, the side surfaces 613a and 614a of the plurality of convex portions 613 and 614 protruding from the flat surface portion 603 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 613 and 614. The convex portions 613 and 614 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 613b and 614b are visible.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group consisting of 613 appears to appear to be white.
  • FIG. 12a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as the eighth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 12b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 710 shown in FIG. 12a
  • 12c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 12b
  • FIG. 12d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 12b
  • FIG. 12e represents a latent image.
  • FIG. 12F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 713 constituting the first convex portion group
  • FIG. 12F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 714 constituting the second convex portion group.
  • a background color region 712 in black is provided in the region which becomes the forgery prevention structure 710 of the sheet base material 702 with respect to the one shown in FIGS. 11a to 11f.
  • white mark portions 711 are provided in a matrix in the background color region 712. That is, the color of the background color region 712 and the color of the mark portion 711 are reversed with respect to those shown in FIGS. 11a to 11f.
  • the latent image “T” when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 711 provided in a matrix in the black background color region 712 in white. Is not recognized.
  • the side surfaces 713a and 714a of the plurality of convex portions 713 and 714 protruding from the plane portion 703 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 713 and 714.
  • the convex portions 713 and 714 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 713b and 714b are visible.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group 713 is black and appears to appear.
  • the convex portions in the fifth to eighth embodiments described above may be of a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without a top portion, or a dome shape.
  • the shape having the apex that is parallel to the plane portion can make the latent image clearly appear in a state in which the colors of the background color region are continuous.
  • the cross section is rectangular.
  • the convex portions 413, 414, 513, and 514 among the convex portions 413 constituting at least a first convex portion group expressing a latent image.
  • the convex portion is formed so as to protrude in parallel to the normal direction of the flat portion. Is preferably formed in a columnar shape such as a cylinder.
  • the latent image “T” is expressed by the shape of the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413, 513, 613, and 713.
  • the latent image “T” may be expressed by the shape of the second convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions 414, 514, 614, 714.
  • the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheets 401, 501, 601, and 701 is changed from the front, it appears on the top portions 414b, 514b, 614b, and 714b of the plurality of convex portions 414, 514, 614, and 714.
  • the latent image “T” appears to appear in the colors that are present, that is, the colors of the mark portions 411, 511, 611, 711.
  • a concave portion recessed from the flat surface portion may be provided, and this concave portion may be used as the embossed portion. That is, as the embossed part of the present invention, either a convex part or a concave part formed on the flat part can be used.
  • FIG. 13a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as a ninth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 13b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 810 shown in FIG. 13a
  • 13c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 13b
  • FIG. 13d is a view showing the configuration of the convex portion 811 provided with the inner mark 813 shown in FIG. 13b
  • FIG. 13e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 811 that is not provided with the inner mark 813 shown in FIG. 13b.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 801 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 810 in a partial region of a sheet base material 802 made of paper.
  • the sheet base material 802 has a flat portion 803, an information printing region 804 is provided in a partial region of the flat portion 803, and a forgery prevention structure 810 is provided in another region.
  • the counterfeit prevention sheet 801 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In that case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information print area 804.
  • the forgery prevention structure 810 Before the information is printed in the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802, it may be possible to print a tint block as a pre-print on the sheet base material 802 or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 810.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 810 provided on the sheet base material 802 includes a plurality of convex portions 811 that are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base material 802, and the periphery of the plurality of convex portions 811.
  • a plurality of outer peripheral marks 812 that are first mark portions respectively provided on the inner surface 813 and an inner mark 813 that is a second mark portion provided only on a predetermined convex portion 811 among the plurality of convex portions 811. It is configured.
  • FIG. 13B the anti-counterfeit structure 810 provided on the sheet base material 802 includes a plurality of convex portions 811 that are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base material 802, and the periphery of the plurality of convex portions 811.
  • a plurality of outer peripheral marks 812 that are first mark portions respectively provided on the inner surface 813 and an inner mark 813 that is a second mark portion provided only on a predetermined convex portion 811 among the pluralit
  • the convex portion 811 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, protrudes about 0.1 mm in the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and has a boundary with the flat portion 803.
  • the portion has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less.
  • the cross-sectional area gradually decreases.
  • the opposite side of the boundary portion is a top portion 811b parallel to the plane portion 803. Therefore, the side surface 811 a of the convex portion 811 is directed in an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 803.
  • the outer peripheral mark 812 is provided by printing on the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 so as to surround the convex portion 811, and the boundary portion between the convex portion 811 and the flat surface portion 803 is circular. It has become.
  • the inner mark 813 is provided by printing over the entire circumference of the side surface 811a of the predetermined convex portion 811 among the plurality of convex portions 811, and the boundary portion between the convex portion 811 and the flat surface portion 803 is circular.
  • the cross-sectional area of the convex portion 811 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the circular shape is obtained when viewed from the normal direction of the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 810 illustrated in this embodiment uses ten convex portions 811 and outer peripheral marks 812, each of which is 10 in length and width for the sake of simplicity of explanation. As shown, the forgery prevention structure 810 makes it possible to make a character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted fine, and to easily express a curve or the like.
  • FIGS. 14a and 14b are views for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e, and show only a region of the sheet base material 802 where the forgery prevention structure 810 is provided.
  • the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are each printed in a circular shape in the region of the sheet base material 802 where the forgery prevention structure 810 is provided.
  • the outer circumference mark 812 is printed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix
  • the inner mark 813 is printed so as to be along the outer circumference mark 812 in the outer circumference mark 812 that is a position where “T” is formed among the 100 outer circumference marks 812.
  • the combination of the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 810, and is given as print data. Further, the printing of the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
  • a plurality of convex portions 811 are formed using an embossed plate in the area where the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are printed.
  • the convex portion 811 is formed inside the 100 outer peripheral marks 812 and the portion provided with the inner mark 813 so that the outer side of the inner mark 813 is a boundary portion with the plane portion 803, thereby
  • the outer peripheral mark 812 surrounds the convex portion 811, and the inner mark 813 has a shape provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion 811.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is manufactured, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802 and used.
  • FIG. 15a is a diagram showing light reflection in the forgery prevention structure 810 when the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front
  • FIG. 15b is due to the light reflection shown in FIG. 15a
  • FIG. 15C is a view showing how the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are seen
  • FIG. 15C is an outer periphery mark 812 and an inner mark in the forgery prevention structure 810 when the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows how 813 looks.
  • the plane portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 is opposed to the observation direction.
  • the amount of light received in the observation direction increases as it is reflected directly in the observation direction.
  • the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810 the outer periphery mark 812 is provided in a region that becomes the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and therefore, as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG.
  • Light from the viewing direction is reflected in the viewing direction on the outer circumference mark 812, thereby making the outer circumference mark 812 clearly visible as shown in FIG. 15b.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is observed from the front, it is in a state not facing the observation direction.
  • the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light is reduced by reflecting in other directions.
  • the inner mark 813 is provided on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811. Therefore, as shown by the broken line in FIG.
  • the inner mark 813 is reflected and dispersed in the direction other than the observation direction, so that the inner mark 813 can be seen only thinly as shown in FIG. 15b.
  • the outer peripheral mark 812 provided around the convex portion 811 where the inner mark 813 is not provided among the plurality of convex portions 811. Only in the convex portion 811 in which the inner mark 813 is provided only on the side surface 811a of the plurality of convex portions 811, the inner mark 813 is only seen thin, but the illusion that the outer peripheral mark 812 is clearly visible As a result, almost only the outer peripheral mark 812 is visible.
  • FIG. 16a is a diagram showing light reflection in the anti-counterfeit structure 810 when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front
  • FIG. FIGS. 16c to 16f are views showing how the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are seen by the reflection of the light shown
  • FIGS. 16c to 16f change the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e from the front.
  • It is a figure which shows the appearance of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 in the forgery prevention structure 810 at the time of becoming.
  • the observation direction approaches a direction facing the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802. Go. Then, on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811, light from the observation direction is reflected as it is in the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light increases.
  • the inner mark 813 is provided on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802, and therefore, the one-dot chain line in FIG. As shown, light from the viewing direction is reflected in the viewing direction on the inner mark 813 so that the inner mark 813 can be clearly seen as shown in FIG. 16b.
  • the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided on the forgery prevention structure 810 the outer periphery mark 812 is provided on the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and therefore, as shown by the broken line in FIG. The light is reflected and dispersed on the outer peripheral mark 812 in the direction other than the observation direction, so that the outer peripheral mark 812 can be seen only thinly as shown in FIG. 16b.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810 is obtained. Appears to appear.
  • the outer peripheral mark 812 provided on the flat portion 803.
  • the convex portion 811 surrounded by the outer peripheral mark 812 is hidden behind the convex portion 811 adjacent to the observation direction side, and the latent image formed by the inner mark 813 is easily visible.
  • the inner mark 813 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the observation direction is formed on the entire circumference of the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802. Since the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 to any direction, the latent image by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge. It becomes like this. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 13A, the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 16D.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 described above When the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802 and the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided by printing on the sheet base material 802 are copied.
  • the convex portion 811 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the inner mark 813 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity.
  • the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810 are not uniform in width as in the present embodiment, and may have a shape partially protruding in the width direction. Further, the inner mark 813 may have a configuration in which the inner side of the illustrated inner mark 813 is all colored. However, in that case, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is observed from the front, the formation angle of the convex portion 811 with respect to the flat portion 803 needs to be steep in order to make the inner mark 813 difficult to see.
  • the convex portion 811 may be conical or dome-shaped without the top portion 811b. Note that in the dome shape, a region that is not substantially parallel to the flat portion 803 of the convex portion is defined as a side surface, and an inner mark 813 is provided in that region.
  • the inner mark 813 forming the latent image is adjacent to the observation direction side before the observation direction faces the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811. Since it is hidden by the portion 811 and the above-described effect cannot be obtained, it is preferable to set appropriately considering the line width of the inner mark 813, the reflectance of the sheet base material 802, and the like.
  • a convex portion 811 is formed as an embossed portion on the flat portion 803, and an inner mark 813 is provided on a side surface 811a of the convex portion 811.
  • a concave portion recessed from the flat portion 803 is provided on the flat portion 803. It may be provided as an embossed portion, and an inner mark 813 may be provided on the inner side surface of this recess. That is, as the embossed portion of the present invention, either a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the flat surface portion 803 can be used.
  • the inner mark 813 is divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 810, it becomes possible to perform authenticity determination also by that.
  • FIG. 17a is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a tenth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 17b shows a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 910 shown in FIG. 17a
  • 17c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 17b
  • FIG. 17d is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 911 provided with the character portion mark 912 shown in FIG. 17b
  • FIG. 17e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 911 provided with the background portion mark 913 shown in FIG. 17b.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 901 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 910 in a partial region of a sheet base material 902 made of paper.
  • the sheet base material 902 has a flat surface portion 903 serving as a base material surface, an information printing region 904 is provided in a partial region of the flat surface portion 903, and a forgery prevention structure 910 is provided in another region.
  • the counterfeit prevention sheet 901 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 904.
  • the sheet base material 902 Before the information is printed in the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902, it may be possible to print a tint block as a pre-print on the sheet base material 902 or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the latent image due to the forgery prevention structure 910 from being difficult to see.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 910 provided on the sheet base material 902 includes a plurality of convex portions 911 that are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base material 902, and the plurality of convex portions 911, as shown in FIG.
  • a character part mark 912 that is a first mark part provided only on a predetermined convex part 911 and a second part provided on a convex part 911 that is not provided with the character part mark 912 among the plurality of convex parts 911.
  • the background portion mark 913 is a mark portion. As shown in FIG.
  • the convex portion 911 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, protrudes about 0.1 mm from the surface of the sheet base material 902 in the normal direction of the flat portion 903, and the flat portion 903
  • the boundary portion is a circular shape having a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. As shown in FIGS. 17d and 17e, the opposite side of the boundary portion is a top portion 911b parallel to the flat portion 903. Therefore, the side surface 911 a of the convex portion 911 faces in an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 903.
  • Character portion mark 912 the printing height from the plane portion 903 of the side surface 911a of the protrusion 911 to a predetermined one of the plurality of protrusions 911 over the entire circumference at a first height h 1 and a position Since the boundary portion between the convex portion 911 and the flat portion 903 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the convex portion 911 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the sheet base material When viewed from the normal direction of the plane portion 903 of 902, the shape is circular.
  • the height h 1 at which the character portion mark 912 is provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 and the height h 2 at which the background portion mark 913 is provided are the height at which the background portion mark 913 is provided.
  • h 2 is lower than the height h 1 at which the character mark 912 is provided.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 910 illustrated in the present embodiment is formed with ten convex portions 911 each in vertical and horizontal directions for the sake of simplicity of explanation. Characters that become latent images that can be lifted by the forgery prevention structure 910 can be made minute, and curves and the like can be easily expressed.
  • FIGS. 18a and 18b are views for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e, and show only the region of the sheet base material 902 where the forgery prevention structure 910 is provided.
  • the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are each printed in a circular shape in the region where the forgery prevention structure 910 of the sheet base material 902 is provided.
  • the character part mark 912 is printed at a position where a “T” that becomes a latent image is formed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix area where the convex part 911 is provided, and the background part mark 913 is printed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix form. Printing is performed at a position in the area where the character mark 912 is not printed.
  • the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are similar to each other, and the diameter thereof is as described above when the convex part 911 is formed in the region where the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are provided. Further, the diameter of the character mark 912 is smaller than the diameter of the background mark 913 so that the height from the plane part 903 is lower than that of the character mark 912 in the background mark 913.
  • the combination of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 910 and is given as print data. Further, the printing of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
  • a plurality of convex portions 911 are formed using an embossed plate in each of the region where the character portion mark 912 is printed and the region where the background portion mark 913 is printed.
  • the convex part 911 is formed so that the outside of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 is a boundary part with the flat part 903, respectively, whereby the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are respectively It becomes the shape provided over the perimeter of the side surface 911a of the convex part 911.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is manufactured, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902 and used.
  • FIG. 19a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front
  • FIG. 19b is shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 in the forgery prevention structure 910 at the time of observing the forgery prevention sheet 901 from the front.
  • the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are similar to each other in the side surface 911a of the convex part 911 so that the height from the flat part 903 is different from each other, and the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is provided.
  • the character mark 912 and the background mark 913 are recognized as substantially the same shape, and the marks of the same shape are formed side by side. It is recognized as a thing.
  • the convex portion 911 is finer, these are more easily recognized as substantially the same shape.
  • FIG. 20a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction of the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front
  • FIG. FIG. 20c is a diagram showing an angle ⁇ 1 of the observation direction with respect to the plane portion 903 when the background mark 913 is not visible when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a state where the character mark 912 is viewed at an angle ⁇ 1 shown in FIG. 20B
  • FIGS. 20D to 20G are front views of the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 in the forgery prevention structure 910 in the case of changing from to.
  • the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 becomes an acute angle.
  • the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is smaller than the angle ⁇ 1 as shown in FIG. 20b, the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911.
  • the background mark 913 is hidden by the protrusion 911 adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusion 911 provided with the background mark 913 and is not visible.
  • the angle ⁇ 1 at which the background mark 913 is hidden by the convex portion 911 and becomes invisible is, as shown in FIG. 20B, on the observation direction side of the background mark 913 and the convex portion 911 provided with the background mark 913.
  • the distance in the direction parallel to the plane part 903 between the end part of the top part 911b of the adjacent convex part 911 is w 1
  • the height difference between the background mark 913 and the convex part 911 with respect to the flat part 903 is t 1.
  • the character part marks 912 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the observation direction are formed on the entire side surface 911a of the convex part 911 formed on the sheet base material 902. Since the plurality of convex portions 911 are provided in a matrix shape, the direction from which direction the plane portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction are smaller than ⁇ 1 is provided. Even when it is observed, the latent image by the character mark 912 appears to appear. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 17A, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 912 appears to appear as shown in FIG.
  • the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a is Although visible, the number of convex portions 911 is large, or the line width of the latent image formed by the character mark 912 is larger than the line width of the background mark 913 as shown in FIGS. 20d to 20g. It is only necessary to recognize that the background mark 913 is irrelevant to the latent image by being thick. If the latent image is obscured by the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 that forms the foremost row in the observation direction, the character mark 912 that forms the latent image is displayed in the matrix. Of the plurality of convex portions 911 formed in a shape, the convex portions 911 separated from the periphery may be provided.
  • the angle formed between the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction is smaller than ⁇ 1, the background of the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 as described above. Although the part mark 913 is hidden and cannot be seen, the angle formed by the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction is further reduced, and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is as shown in FIG.
  • the angle ⁇ 2 is smaller than the angle ⁇ 2 , even the character mark 912 provided on the side surface 911 a of the protrusion 911 is adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusion 911 provided with the character mark 912.
  • the part 911 hides and cannot be seen. That is, when the angle ⁇ formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is ⁇ 2 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 1 , the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911. Among them, only the character part mark 912 becomes visible, so that the latent image “T” appears to appear. It should be noted that the angle ⁇ 2 at which the character mark 912 is hidden by the convex portion 911 and becomes invisible is, as shown in FIG. 20c, on the observation direction side of the character mark 912 and the convex portion 911 provided with the character mark 912.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 901 described above When the forgery prevention sheet 901 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902 and the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 provided by printing on the sheet base material 902 are copied. However, the convex portion 911 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even if the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the character mark 912 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 901 of the present embodiment when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 901 of the present embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 901 is changed in any direction from the normal direction of the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 Even so, since the latent image by the character mark 912 appears to emerge, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is authentic without being limited to the observation direction.
  • the character mark 912, the background mark 913, and the outer peripheral mark 914 provided in the forgery prevention structure 910 are not uniform in width as in this embodiment, and a part of the mark protrudes in the width direction. It may be. Further, it may be connected by a broken line.
  • the region where the character mark 912 is provided may not be the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 but the top portion 911b of the convex portion 911. Also in that case, the height of the character part mark 912 with respect to the flat part 903 is higher than the height at which the background part mark 913 of the convex part 911 is provided, and it is necessary to have a similar shape to the background part mark 913.
  • the convex portion 911 may be a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without the top portion 911b, or a dome shape. It is also conceivable that the cross section is rectangular. However, the distance from the center is substantially constant such that the boundary portion of the concave portion 911 with the flat surface portion 903 is circular, and accordingly, the distance from the center is approximately the same as the character mark 912 is also circular. The shape of the character mark 912 that can be visually recognized from any direction becomes the same when it is made constant, and the fine shape of the latent image that appears by the character mark 912 can be made uniform. .
  • the protrusions 911 are formed so as to protrude in parallel, and each of the convex portions 911 is formed in a columnar shape such as a cylinder.
  • the height of the character mark 912 in the convex portion 911 is higher than the height of the background mark 913, but the height of the background mark 913 is set to the height of the character mark 912. It can be considered that the height is higher than the height so that the latent image emerges as white characters.
  • the character mark 912 is divided in the circumferential direction so that the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 910, it becomes possible to perform authenticity determination also by that.
  • the similar shape referred to in the present application is not only a general shape similar shape but also a circular shape with a part of the circumference cut off or a part of the circumference slightly distorted. Also, a shape that is slightly elliptical or slightly distorted to a shape that approaches a triangle or a rectangle is defined as a similar shape.
  • FIG. 21a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as the eleventh embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 21b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 shown in FIG. 21a
  • FIG. 21c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 21b
  • FIG. 21d is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group shown in FIG. 21b
  • FIG. 21e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 1011 that constitutes the second convex portion group shown in FIG. 21b.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 1001 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 1010 in a partial region of a sheet base material 1002 made of paper.
  • the sheet base material 1002 has a flat portion 1003, an information printing region 1004 is provided in a partial region of the flat portion 1003, and a forgery prevention structure 1010 is provided in another region.
  • the counterfeit prevention sheet 1001 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 1004.
  • the sheet base material 1002 Before the information is printed in the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 1002 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary that the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 1010 is not difficult to see.
  • a plurality of convex portions 1011 which are embossed portions are formed in a matrix shape on the sheet base material 1002, and each of the convex portions 1011 is formed. Marks 1012 and 1013 are printed so as to overlap.
  • the convex portion 1011 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, and the sheet base material 1002 is 0.05 to 0.
  • a side surface 1011a is formed by being recessed by about 1 mm, and the same surface as the flat portion 1003 is a top portion 1011b.
  • the cross-sectional area gradually increases from the top portion 1011b toward the recess direction of the sheet base material 1002, and the bottom portion of the convex portion 1011 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less.
  • the plurality of convex portions 1011 includes a convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed on the side surface 1011a and a convex portion constituting the second convex portion group in which the mark 1012 is formed on the side surface 1011a. 1011.
  • the mark 1013 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the mark 1012 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group are all of the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011.
  • the line width of the mark portion 1013 is larger than the line width of the mark portion 1012.
  • the convex part 1011 which comprises a 1st convex part group, and the convex part 1011 which comprises a 2nd convex part group differ from each other in the coloration ratio in the side surface 1011a, when observed from the same direction.
  • the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed is arranged at a position expressing the latent image “T” among the plurality of convex portions 1011 formed in a matrix.
  • the other convex part 1011 comprises a 2nd convex part group.
  • 100 convex portions 1011 are formed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix, and the 100 convex portions 1011 have marks 1012 or marks. 1013 is formed, but the larger the number, the finer the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by this anti-counterfeit structure 1010, expressing a curve or the like. It becomes easy.
  • a plurality of circular marks 1012 and 1013 are printed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix in a region where the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 of the sheet base material 1002 is provided.
  • the mark 1013 is printed at a position where “T” is formed in a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix, and the mark 1012 is printed at other positions.
  • a combination of these marks 1012 and 1013 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 1010 and is given as print data.
  • the marks 1012 and 1013 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
  • a plurality of convex portions 1011 are formed by pressing the embossed plate from the flat portion 1003 side of the sheet base material 1002 to the area where the marks 1012 and 1013 are printed.
  • the pitch of the convex portions 1011 by the embossed plate is the same as the pitch of the marks 1012 and 1013, and the convex portions 1011 are formed so as to overlap the marks 1012 and 1013, so that the mark portions 1012 and 1013 are respectively convex portions 1011. It will be in the state formed over the perimeter of side surface 1011a.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and used.
  • FIG. 22a is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front.
  • 22b is a diagram showing how the mark 1013 appears due to the reflection of light shown in FIG. 22a
  • FIG. 22c shows the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front.
  • FIG. 22d is a diagram showing the reflection of light in the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group for explanation
  • FIG. 22d is a diagram showing how the mark 1012 is seen by the reflection of light shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 22e is a diagram showing how the marks 1012 and 1013 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1010 of the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e.
  • the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002 is not opposed to the observation direction. Is reflected also in directions other than the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light is reduced. Since the mark 1013 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011, light from the observation direction is reflected on the mark 1013 in the direction other than the observation direction as indicated by a broken line in FIG. As a result, the mark 1013 can only be seen thin as shown in FIG. 22b.
  • the mark 1012 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is also provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011. Therefore, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is observed from the front, it is observed as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 22c. Light from the direction is reflected and dispersed on the mark 1012 in directions other than the viewing direction, so that the mark 1012 can only be seen thin as shown in FIG. 22d.
  • the marks 1012 and 1013 can only be seen thin, so that the mark on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group.
  • the difference between the color arrangement ratio by 1013 and the color arrangement ratio by the mark 1012 on the side surface 1011a of the convex part 1011 constituting the second convex part group is not clearly recognized, thereby constituting the first convex part group.
  • the convex portion 1011 and the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group can only be vaguely identified, and the convex portion 1011 that forms the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed on the side surface 1011a.
  • the latent image “T” is not clearly recognized. Further, if the angle formed by the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 with respect to the flat surface portion 1003 is close to 90 degrees, the mark 1012 and the mark 1013 formed on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 have different line widths, but they are counterfeit.
  • the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group Can only be vaguely identified.
  • FIG. 23a is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIG. 23b is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front.
  • FIGS. 23c to 23f are diagrams showing how the marks 1012 and 1013 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1010 when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. is there.
  • the observation direction When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 illustrated in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front, the observation direction approaches a direction facing the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002. Go. Then, on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011, light from the observation direction is reflected as it is in the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light increases. Since the mark 1013 provided on the forgery prevention structure 1010 is provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002, the light from the observation direction is irradiated with the mark 1013 as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Reflects upward in the viewing direction, thereby making the mark 1013 clearly visible.
  • the mark 1012 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is also provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002, the light from the observation direction as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. Is reflected in the viewing direction on the mark 1012 so that the mark 1012 can be clearly seen.
  • the line width difference between the mark 1012 and the mark 1013 that is, the line width difference.
  • the difference between the color arrangement ratio on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the color arrangement ratio on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group is clarified.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the formed convex portion 1011 appears to appear floating.
  • the convex portion 1011 when the convex portion 1011 is formed in the vicinity, or when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 is greatly changed from the normal direction of the sheet base material 1002, the convex portion constituting the second convex portion group.
  • the mark 1012 formed on the side surface 1011a of the 1011 is hidden by the convex portion 1011 adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion 1011 so that the latent image formed by the mark 1013 is easily visible. This effect is easier to obtain as the mark 1012 is formed in a region away from the top 1011b of the convex portion 1011.
  • the marks 1012 and 1013 for raising the latent image depending on the observation direction are respectively provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002.
  • the coloration ratio by the mark 1012 on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 on which the mark 1012 is formed and the color scheme by the mark 1013 on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 on which the mark 1013 is formed Since the ratios are different from each other when observed from the same direction, even if the observation direction is changed in any direction from the normal direction of the planar portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002, The latent image emerges and appears.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23d.
  • the latent image “T” formed by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23e.
  • the latent image “T” constituted by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23f.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 described above When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and the marks 1012 and 1013 provided by printing on the sheet base material 1002 are copied. Up to 1011 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the appearance of the marks 1012 and 1013 does not change, and the latent image by the mark 1013 does not appear, so that authenticity determination is performed. Is possible.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 1001 of this embodiment when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 1001 of this embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002 to which direction Even so, since the appearance of the marks 1012 and 1013 changes and the latent image by the mark 1013 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine the authenticity of the latent image without being limited to the observation direction. Further, since the convex portion 1011 is formed by recessing the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002, the convex portion 10011 is recognized when the sheet base material 1002 is viewed from the front or back side or directly touched. Therefore, the convex portion 1011 is difficult to reproduce, and the forgery prevention function can be improved.
  • the mark 1013 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group is not only on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 but also on the top portion 1011b. It may be formed.
  • the line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the first convex portion group formed on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 expressing the latent image “T” is equal to the side surface 1011a of the other convex portion 1011.
  • the line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the second convex portion group is described as an example, but the line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the first convex portion group is If the line widths of the mark portions 1012 constituting the second convex portion group are different from each other, the line widths of the mark portions 1013 constituting the first convex portion group are marks constituting the second convex portion group. It may be narrower than the line width of the portion 1012.
  • the mark 1013 is divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 1010, it also becomes possible to perform authenticity determination by it.
  • FIG. 24a is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as a twelfth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention
  • FIG. 24b shows a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 1110 shown in FIG. 24c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 24b
  • FIG. 24d is a diagram showing a configuration of the recess 1111 provided with the character mark 1112 shown in FIG. 24b.
  • FIG. 24e is a diagram showing the configuration of the recess 1111 provided with the background mark 1113 shown in FIG. 24b.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 of this embodiment is configured by providing an anti-counterfeit structure 1110 in a partial region of a sheet base material 1102 made of paper, as shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e.
  • the sheet base material 1102 has a flat surface 1103 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 1104 is provided in a part of the flat part 1103 and a forgery prevention structure 1110 is provided in another region. .
  • the counterfeit prevention sheet 1101 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In that case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, and the like are printed in the information print area 1104.
  • the sheet base material 1102 Before the information is printed in the information printing area 1104 of the sheet base material 1102, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 1102 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 1110.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 1110 provided on the sheet base 1102 has a plurality of recesses 1111 which are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base 1102 and a predetermined one of the plurality of recesses 1111 as shown in FIG. 24b.
  • a character mark 1112 which is a first mark portion provided only in the recessed portion 1111 and a second mark portion provided in a recess 1111 where the character portion mark 1112 is not provided among the plurality of recesses 1111. It consists of a background part mark 1113. As shown in FIG.
  • the recess 1111 is recessed by about 0.1 mm from the plane portion 1103 in the thickness direction of the sheet base 1102, and a boundary portion with the plane portion 1103 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. As shown in FIGS. 24d and 24e, the opposite side of the boundary portion is a bottom portion 1111b parallel to the plane portion 1103. Therefore, the inner side surface 1111 a of the recess 1111 faces an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 1103.
  • Character portion Mark 1112 by printing over the entire circumference in advance inside surface depth from the plane portion 1103 of 1111a of-determined recesses 1111 is the first depth d 1 position of the plurality of recesses 1111 Since the boundary portion between the concave portion 1111 and the flat portion 1103 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the concave portion 1111 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the plane of the sheet base material 1102 is reduced. When viewed from the normal direction of the portion 1103, the shape is circular.
  • the entire periphery at the character portion mark 1112 is a depth from the plane portion 3 of the inner surface 11a of the concave portion 1111 is not provided the second depth d 2 position of the plurality of recesses 1111 Since the boundary portion between the concave portion 1111 and the flat portion 1103 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the concave portion 1111 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the sheet When viewed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1103 of the substrate 1102, the substrate 1102 has a circular shape.
  • the depth d 1 at which the character portion mark 1112 is provided on the inner surface 1111 a of the recess 1111 and the depth d 2 at which the background portion mark 1113 is provided are the depth at which the background portion mark 1113 is provided.
  • d 2 is deeper than the depth d 1 at which the character mark 1112 is provided.
  • the anti-counterfeit structure 1110 illustrated in this embodiment is formed with ten recesses 1111 in each of the vertical and horizontal directions for the sake of simplicity of explanation. A character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the prevention structure 1110 can be made minute, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
  • FIGS. 25a and 25b are diagrams for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e, and show only a region of the sheet base material 1002 where the forgery prevention structure 1110 is provided.
  • the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 are printed in a circular shape in the region where the forgery prevention structure 1110 of the sheet base material 1002 is provided.
  • the character part mark 1112 is printed at a position where a latent image “T” is formed in the 10 ⁇ 10 matrix area where the recess 1111 is provided, and the background part mark 1113 is a 10 ⁇ 10 matrix area.
  • the character part mark 1112 is printed at a position where it is not printed.
  • the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are similar to each other, and the diameter thereof is as described above when the concave portion 1111 is formed in the region where the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are provided.
  • the diameter of the character mark 1112 is larger than the diameter of the background mark 1113 so that the background mark 1113 is deeper than the character mark 1112 from the flat surface 1103.
  • the combination of the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 is set in advance according to the latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 10 and is given as print data.
  • the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
  • a plurality of recesses 1111 are formed using an embossed plate in each of the area where the character part mark 1112 is printed and the area where the background part mark 1113 is printed.
  • the concave portion 1111 is formed so that the outer sides of the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are the boundary portions with the plane portion 1103, respectively, so that the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are respectively recessed portions.
  • the shape is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface 1111 a of 1111.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and used.
  • transparent resin is apply
  • FIG. 26a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front, and FIG. 26b is shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 in the forgery prevention structure 1110 at the time of observing the forgery prevention sheet 1001 from the front.
  • the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 are provided with different depths from the flat part 1103 on the inner surface 1111a of the concave part 1111, they are similar to each other, and the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 When viewed from the front, it will be observed in the depth direction, whereby the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are recognized as substantially the same shape, and the marks having the same shape are formed side by side. Is recognized as being. As the recess 1111 is finer, these are more easily recognized as substantially the same shape.
  • FIG. 27a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front
  • FIG. 27b is a cross-sectional view.
  • state background mark 1113 shown is a diagram showing a viewing direction at an angle theta 1 with respect to the plane portion 1003 when the invisible
  • FIG 27c is viewed character portion mark 1112 at an angle theta 1 shown in FIG. 27b to FIGS. 27d to 27g are views showing how the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1110.
  • FIG. 27a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front
  • FIG. 27b is a cross-sectional view.
  • state background mark 1113 shown is a diagram showing a viewing direction at an angle theta 1 with respect to the plane portion 1003 when the invisible
  • the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 becomes an acute angle.
  • the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 is smaller than the angle ⁇ 1 as shown in FIG. 27b, the character portion mark 12 and the background portion mark provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 13, the background mark 13 is hidden behind the edge of the flat surface 1103 on the observation direction side of the recess 1111 provided with the background mark 1113.
  • angle ⁇ 1 tan ⁇ 1 where w 1 is the distance in the direction parallel to the plane portion 1103 between the edge of the plane portion 1103 and the depth of the background mark 1113 from the plane portion 1103 is t 1. It is expressed by (t 1 / w 1 ).
  • the character part mark 1112 even when the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat part 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 becomes an angle ⁇ 1 at which the background part mark 1113 cannot be seen, as shown in FIG.
  • the concave portion 1111 provided with the character mark 1112 is not hidden by the edge of the flat portion 1103 on the observation direction side.
  • the character mark 1112 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the viewing direction is formed on the entire inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 formed on the sheet base 1102. Since it is provided over the circumference, as long as the angle formed by the flat surface 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 and the observation direction is smaller than ⁇ 1 , the latent mark 1112 is hidden by the character mark 1112 regardless of the direction of observation.
  • the statue emerges and appears. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 24a, the latent image “T” constituted by the character mark 1112 appears to appear as shown in FIG.
  • the angle formed by the flat surface 1103 of the sheet base 1102 and the observation direction is smaller than ⁇ 1, the background of the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 as described above. Although the part mark 1113 is hidden and cannot be seen, the angle formed by the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 and the observation direction is further reduced, and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 is as shown in FIG.
  • the angle ⁇ 2 is smaller than the angle ⁇ 2 , even the character mark 1112 provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 extends to the plane portion 1103 on the observation direction side of the recess 1111 provided with the character mark 1112.
  • Angle ⁇ 2 tan ⁇ 1 where w 2 is the distance in the direction parallel to the plane portion 1103 between the edges of the plane portion 1103 and t 2 is the depth of the character portion mark 1112 from the plane portion 1103. It is represented by (t 2 / w 2 ).
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 described above When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 1104 of the sheet base 1102 and the character mark 1112 and the background mark 1113 provided by printing on the sheet base 1102 are copied. However, the concave portion 1111 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even if the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the character mark 1112 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity.
  • the forgery prevention sheet 1101 of the present embodiment when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1101 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the character mark 1112 appears to emerge, the authenticity determination by the latent image can be easily performed without being limited to the observation direction.
  • the height from the flat portion of the convex portion or the depth of the flat portion of the concave portion and the dimension of the boundary portion with the flat portion in the embodiment described above are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.
  • the convex part and the concave part have a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without a top portion, or a dome shape. It is also conceivable that the cross section is rectangular.
  • the information that becomes a latent image is not limited to a plurality of convex portions and concave portions that form rows and columns as in the above-described “T”, but a plurality of convex portions and concave portions only form rows, or It may be configured only in columns. Moreover, it is not limited to one consisting of a single character, but may be one consisting of a plurality of characters or a pattern. It is also conceivable to divide a plurality of convex portions representing a latent image into a plurality of regions and to make characters and the like appear in each of the plurality of regions.
  • the plurality of protrusions and recesses around the latent image do not completely surround the area where the plurality of protrusions and recesses representing the latent image are formed, but a part thereof is opened,
  • the plurality of convex portions and concave portions around the latent image may have a shape surrounding a region where the plurality of convex portions expressing the latent image are formed.
  • the plurality of convex portions and concave portions constitute rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic coloration regions and mark portions.
  • the direction of the row and the column to be configured may have a slight angle with respect to the arrangement direction of a plurality of periodic coloration regions, mark portions, and the like.
  • the anti-counterfeit sheet has been described as an example of the anti-counterfeit sheet provided with the anti-counterfeit structure on the sheet base material made of paper.
  • the present invention can be applied to a sheet base material made of a film or a card base material in which a plurality of resin layers are laminated and provided with a forgery prevention structure as described above.

Abstract

An anticounterfeit medium which is capable of easily judging authenticity using a latent image without limitation in a visible direction. The anticounterfeit medium has a display part consisting of a cyclic color scheme region (11) and a background color region (12) which are disposed in a given array in combination, and convex parts (13, 14) which are disposed in a given array to wholly or partly overlap with the cyclic color scheme region (11) and the background color region (12). Such a configuration changes colors visible by the cyclic color schemes and background colors depending on the case of observation from a normal line direction of a base material and the case of change in the observation direction from the normal line direction of the base material, thereby allowing authenticity to be judged.

Description

偽造防止媒体Anti-counterfeit media
 本発明は、偽造防止シート等の偽造防止媒体に関し、特に、潜像を用いた偽造防止構造に関する。 The present invention relates to an anti-counterfeit medium such as an anti-counterfeit sheet, and more particularly to an anti-counterfeit structure using a latent image.
 従来より、プリペイドカードや各種入場券、商品券や株券等の有価証券においては、広く流通しており比較的容易に換金可能である等の理由から、偽造犯罪が頻発している。特に、近年ではカラーコピー機等の複写機の性能向上と普及に伴い、簡単には真正品と見分けられない偽造品が比較的容易に製造可能になってきており、偽造に対する対策が求められている。また、上述したような有価証券に限らず、紙幣においても偽造に対する対策が求められている。 In the past, counterfeit crimes have frequently occurred in securities such as prepaid cards, various admission tickets, gift certificates and stock certificates because they are widely distributed and can be exchanged relatively easily. In particular, in recent years, with the improvement and popularization of copying machines such as color copiers, counterfeit products that cannot be easily distinguished from genuine products can be manufactured relatively easily, and countermeasures against counterfeiting are required. Yes. Moreover, measures against counterfeiting are required not only for the above-mentioned securities but also for banknotes.
 このような偽造に対する対策の1つとして、潜像を用いて有価証券や紙幣の真偽判別を可能とする技術が考えられており、例えば、特許公開2000-313161号公報に開示されている。 As one of countermeasures against such counterfeiting, a technique that makes it possible to determine the authenticity of securities and banknotes using a latent image is considered, and is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-313161.
 特許公開2000-313161号公報に開示された技術は、シート基材上に、複数本の印刷万線と、この印刷万線と並列し、一部が印刷万線と直交する方向に延在し、かつ、断面が隆起したレリーフ万線とを設け、視認方向によって潜像を浮かび上がらせるものである。基材を正面から見た場合は全ての印刷万線が視認可能な状態となっている。ところが、視認方向を印刷万線及びレリーフ万線と直交する方向に変化させていくと、印刷万線のうちレリーフ万線が延在した部分がその延在したレリーフ万線の陰となって視認できなくなる一方、印刷万線のその他の部分は視認可能な状態のままとなる。これにより、レリーフ万線の形状に応じた潜像を浮かび上がらせることができる。 The technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2000-313161 is a sheet substrate on which a plurality of printed lines are arranged in parallel to the printed lines, and a part thereof extends in a direction perpendicular to the printed lines. In addition, a relief line with a raised cross section is provided, and the latent image is raised depending on the viewing direction. When the substrate is viewed from the front, all the printed lines are visible. However, when the viewing direction is changed to the direction perpendicular to the printing lines and relief lines, the portion of the printing lines where the relief lines extend is visible behind the extended relief lines. While not possible, the other parts of the printed line remain visible. Thereby, a latent image corresponding to the shape of the relief line can be raised.
 このように断面が隆起したレリーフ万線を設けたシート基材においては、複写した場合、表面に印刷された印刷万線を含む印刷情報は複写されるものの、レリーフ万線の隆起形状までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の視認方向を変化させていった場合であっても、潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In this way, in the case of a sheet base material provided with a relief line with a raised cross section, the printed information including the printed line printed on the surface is copied, but the raised shape of the relief line is reproduced. Can not. For this reason, even if the viewing direction of the copy is changed, the latent image does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity.
 しかしながら、上述したように、シート基材上に、複数本の印刷万線と、この印刷万線と並列し、一部が印刷万線と直交する方向に延在し、かつ、断面が隆起したレリーフ万線とを設け、この印刷万線とレリーフ万線とで潜像を浮かび上がらせるものにおいては、印刷万線及びレリーフ万線と直交する方向から視認した場合にしか潜像が浮かび上がらず、潜像による真偽判別がしやすいとは言い難い。特に、視認方向が制限されている場合、潜像による真偽判別ができなくなる虞れがある。 However, as described above, on the sheet base material, a plurality of printed lines, parallel to the printed lines, a part extends in a direction perpendicular to the printed lines, and the cross-section is raised. In the case where a relief line is provided and a latent image is raised by the printed line and the relief line, the latent image is raised only when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the printed line and the relief line. It is hard to say that it is easy to determine authenticity by image. In particular, when the viewing direction is restricted, there is a possibility that the authenticity determination based on the latent image cannot be performed.
 本発明は、上述したような従来の技術が有する問題点に鑑みてなされたものであって、視認方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる偽造防止媒体を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the problems of the conventional techniques as described above, and provides a forgery prevention medium capable of easily performing authenticity determination by a latent image without being limited to the viewing direction. The purpose is to provide.
 上記目的を達成するために本発明は、
 第1及び第2の配色部を組み合わせて所定の配列に並べてなる表示部と、
 前記第1及び第2の配色部に全部または一部が重なるように前記表示部上に所定の配列に並べられて設けられたエンボス部とを有する。
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides:
A display unit configured by combining the first and second color arrangement units and arranging them in a predetermined arrangement;
And an embossed portion arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the display portion so that all or part of the first and second color arrangement portions overlap.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材の法線方向から観察した場合と観察方向を基材の法線方向から変化させていった場合とで第1及び第2の配色部によって視認される色が変化し、それにより、真偽判別が可能となる。 In the present invention configured as described above, the first and second color arrangement portions are used when observed from the normal direction of the substrate and when the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the substrate. The visually recognized color changes, thereby enabling authenticity determination.
 また、所定の配列に並べられた複数のエンボス部と、
 前記エンボス部の側面または前記エンボス部の間に設けられた配色部とを有する。
A plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement;
A color arrangement portion provided between a side surface of the embossed portion or between the embossed portions.
 また、所定の配列に並べられた複数のエンボス部と、
 前記エンボス部の側面または頂点領域の周辺全周に渡って設けられた配色部とを有する。
A plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement;
A color arrangement portion provided over the entire periphery of the side surface or apex region of the embossed portion.
 このように構成された本発明においても、基材の法線方向から観察した場合と観察方向を基材の法線方向から変化させていった場合とで配色部によって視認される色が変化し、それにより、真偽判別が可能となる。 Also in the present invention configured as described above, the color visually recognized by the color arrangement portion changes between when observed from the normal direction of the substrate and when the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the substrate. Thereby, authenticity determination is possible.
 また、前記第1の配色部は、基材表面に設けられ、
 前記第2の配色部は、前記第1の配色部とは異なる色を具備し、前記第1の配色部上に行及び/または列を構成して一定周期で設けられ、
 前記エンボス部は、
 前記第1の配色部の所定領域に、前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、前記基材表面に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで前記第1の配色部と前記第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なるように前記一定周期で形成された複数の第1の凸部と、
 前記第1の配色部における前記所定領域以外の領域に、前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行し、かつ、前記複数の第1の凸部の行及び/または列に対してずれた行及び/または列を構成し、前記中心線と平行な中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで前記第1の配色部と前記第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なり、かつ、該面積の大小関係が、前記第1の凸部における前記中心線を介した同一方向側の領域に対して逆転するように前記一定周期で形成された複数の第2の凸部とを有する。
In addition, the first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate,
The second color arrangement unit has a color different from that of the first color arrangement unit, and is provided on the first color arrangement unit at regular intervals by configuring rows and / or columns,
The embossed part is
In a predetermined area of the first color arrangement portion, rows and / or columns are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface. A plurality of first convex portions formed at the predetermined period so that the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion are different from each other in each of the two regions,
In a region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion, parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions and shifted with respect to the rows and / or columns of the plurality of first convex portions. The areas of the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part are different from each other in each of the two regions separated by a center line parallel to the center line, and And a plurality of second convex portions formed at the predetermined period so that the magnitude relationship of the areas is reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the first convex portion. .
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材を正面から視認した場合、基材表面の第1の配色部に第1の配色部とは異なる色で行及び/または列を構成して設けられた複数の第2の配色部が認識される。基材には複数の第1の凸部及び第2の凸部が形成されているが、基材を正面から視認した場合は、この第1の凸部及び第2の凸部の凸形状における頂部側から底部側に向かって視認することになるため、行及び/または列を構成した複数の第2の配色部が認識されるだけであり、潜像は浮かび上がって見えてこない。この状態から視認方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていくと、基材に形成された複数の第1の凸部及び第2の凸部の視認方向側のみが見えるようになっていく。この際、複数の第1の凸部はそれぞれ、基材表面に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なるように形成され、また、複数の第2の凸部はそれぞれ、第1の凸部の中心線と平行な中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なり、かつ、その面積の大小関係が、複数の第1の凸部における中心線を介した同一方向側の領域に対して逆転するように形成されているため、視認方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていくと、第1の凸部と第2の凸部とでは、視認方向と直交する中心線を介して視認方向側となる領域における第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積の大小関係が逆転していることとなり、それにより、第1の凸部と第2の凸部とで第1の配色部の色と第2の配色部の色とによって見える色が互いに異なり、この色の違いによって複数の第1の凸部または複数の第2の凸部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。ここで、本発明においては、第1の凸部及び第2の凸部が、基材表面に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なるように形成され、かつ、その面積の大小関係が中心線を介した同一方向側の領域において互いに逆転しているので、基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から視認した場合であっても、第1の凸部と第2の凸部とで第1の配色部の色と第2の配色部の色とによって見える色が互いに異なり、その色の違いによって複数の第1の凸部または複数の第2の凸部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。なおこの際、視認する方向によって、第1の凸部と第2の凸部のそれぞれにおいて中心線を介して視認方向側における第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積の大小関係が変化するため、浮かび上がる潜像と背景との色の関係が変化し、潜像を認識しやすくなる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when the base material is viewed from the front, the first color arrangement portion on the surface of the base material is configured with rows and / or columns in a color different from the first color arrangement portion. A plurality of second color arrangement portions provided are recognized. A plurality of first convex portions and second convex portions are formed on the base material, but when the base material is viewed from the front, the convex shape of the first convex portion and the second convex portion is Since it is visually recognized from the top side toward the bottom side, only a plurality of second color arrangement portions constituting rows and / or columns are recognized, and the latent image does not appear to appear. When the viewing direction is changed from this state to a direction that forms an acute angle with the substrate surface, only the viewing direction side of the plurality of first protrusions and second protrusions formed on the substrate is visible. It will become. At this time, each of the plurality of first convex portions has an area of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion in each of two regions separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface. The plurality of second protrusions are formed differently, and each of the plurality of second protrusions is separated from each other by a center line parallel to the center line of the first protrusions. Are different from each other, and the size relationship of the areas is formed so as to be reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the plurality of first convex portions. When the viewing direction is changed to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the first convex portion and the second convex portion are regions on the viewing direction side through a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction. The size relationship of the area between the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part is reversed. The first convex portion and the second convex portion have different colors that can be seen depending on the color of the first color arrangement portion and the color of the second color arrangement portion. Alternatively, the latent image formed by the plurality of second protrusions appears to appear. Here, in the present invention, the first and second convex portions are separated from each other in two regions separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface. Since the area of the color arrangement part is different from each other, and the area size relationship is reversed in the region on the same direction side through the center line, it makes an acute angle with the substrate surface. Even when viewed from the direction, the first and second convex portions have different colors that can be seen depending on the colors of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion. As a result, the latent image formed by the plurality of first protrusions or the plurality of second protrusions appears to appear. At this time, depending on the viewing direction, there is a size relationship between the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion on the visual recognition direction side via the center line in each of the first convex portion and the second convex portion. As a result, the color relationship between the latent image that emerges and the background changes, making it easier to recognize the latent image.
 このように、第1の配色部にこの第1の配色部とは色が異なる複数の第2の配色部が行及び/または列を構成して設けられ、この第1の配色部の所定領域にて、複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成して形成された複数の第1の凸部のそれぞれが、基材表面に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なり、また、第1の配色部の所定領域以外の領域にて、複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行し、かつ複数の第1の凸部の行及び/または列に対してずれた行及び/または列を構成して形成された複数の第2の凸部のそれぞれが、第1の凸部の中心線と平行な中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なり、かつ、その面積の大小関係が、複数の第1の凸部における中心線を介した同一方向側の領域に対して逆転した構成としたため、基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から視認した場合であっても、第1の凸部と第2の凸部とで第1の配色部の色と第2の配色部の色とによって見える色が互いに異なり、その色の違いによって複数の第1の凸部または複数の第2の凸部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになり、視認方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。また、視認する方向によって、第1の凸部と第2の凸部のそれぞれにおいて中心線を介して視認方向側における第1の配色部と第2の配色部との面積の大小関係が変化するため、浮かび上がる潜像と背景との色の関係が変化し、潜像を認識しやすくなる。 Thus, the first color arrangement unit is provided with a plurality of second color arrangement units having colors different from those of the first color arrangement unit in a row and / or column, and a predetermined region of the first color arrangement unit. In each of the plurality of first convex portions formed by forming rows and / or columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface The areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion are different from each other in each of the two regions separated in step, and a plurality of second color arrangement portions are provided in regions other than the predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion. Each of the plurality of second protrusions formed in a row and / or column parallel to the arrangement direction of the color arrangement portion and shifted from the rows and / or columns of the plurality of first protrusions The area of the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part in each of the two regions separated by the center line parallel to the center line of the first convex part Different directions and the size relationship of the areas are reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the plurality of first protrusions, so which direction forms an acute angle with the substrate surface Even if it is visually recognized from the color of the first convex portion and the second convex portion, the colors seen by the color of the first color arrangement portion and the color of the second color arrangement portion are different from each other, The latent images formed by the plurality of first protrusions or the plurality of second protrusions appear to be raised, and the authenticity determination by the latent images can be easily performed without being limited to the viewing direction. In addition, depending on the viewing direction, the size relationship of the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion on the viewing direction side changes via the center line in each of the first convex portion and the second convex portion. For this reason, the color relationship between the latent image that emerges and the background changes, and it becomes easier to recognize the latent image.
 また、前記第1の配色部は、基材表面に設けられ、
 前記第2の配色部は、前記第1の配色部上にて該第1の配色部とは異なる色を有してマトリックス状に設けられ、
 前記エンボス部は、
 前記第1の配色部の所定領域にて前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、前記第1の配色部の色が頂部にて表出するように前記基材表面から突出して形成された複数の凸部からなる第1の凸部群と、
 前記第1の配色部における前記所定領域以外の領域にて前記第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、頂部が当該第2の配色部を含むように前記基材表面から突出して形成された複数の凸部からなる第2の凸部群とを有する。
In addition, the first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate,
The second color arrangement portion is provided in a matrix shape having a color different from the first color arrangement portion on the first color arrangement portion,
The embossed part is
A row and / or a column is formed in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and the color of the first color arrangement portion is expressed at the top. A first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex parts formed so as to protrude from the substrate surface,
In the region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion, a row and / or a column are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of convex portions constituting the first convex portion group, and the top portion is the second portion. And a second convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions formed so as to protrude from the surface of the base material so as to include the color arrangement portion.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材を正面から観察した場合、基材表面の第1の配色部に第1の配色部とは異なる色でマトリックス状に設けられた複数の第2の配色部が認識される。基材には基材表面から突出した複数の凸部が形成されているが、基材を正面から観察した場合は、この凸部の突出方向から観察することになるため、複数の第2の配色部がマトリックス状となって認識されるだけであり、潜像は浮かび上がって見えてこない。この状態から観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていくと、基材表面から突出した複数の凸部の側面が、その凸部の観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部のみが見えるような状態となる。その際、複数の凸部のうち、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部においては第1の配色部の色が頂部にて表出しており、また、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部においては第1の配色部とは異なる色の第2の配色部が頂部にて表出している。そのため、これらの色の違いによって第1の凸部群または第2の凸部群による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。ここで、本発明においては、第1の配色部に複数の第2の配色部がマトリックス状に設けられ、この第1の配色部の所定領域にて複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成した複数の凸部からなる第1の凸部群が形成されるとともに、第1の配色部における所定領域以外の領域にて第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成した複数の凸部からなる第2の凸部群が形成されているので、基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、基材表面から突出した複数の凸部の側面が、その凸部の観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部のみが見えるような状態となり、第1の凸部群の頂部の色と第2の凸部群の頂部の色との違いによって第1の凸部群または第2の凸部群による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when the base material is observed from the front, the first color arrangement portion on the surface of the base material is provided with a plurality of first colors arranged in a matrix with a color different from the first color arrangement portion. Two color schemes are recognized. The base material has a plurality of convex portions protruding from the surface of the base material. However, when the base material is observed from the front, the base material is observed from the protruding direction of the convex portions. The color arrangement part is only recognized as a matrix, and the latent image is not visible. When the observation direction is changed from this state to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the side surfaces of the plurality of protrusions protruding from the substrate surface are projected by the protrusions adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusions. Hidden and invisible, only the top is visible. At that time, among the plurality of convex portions, in the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group, the color of the first color arrangement portion is expressed at the top portion, and also constitutes the second convex portion group. In the convex portion, a second color arrangement portion having a color different from that of the first color arrangement portion is exposed at the top portion. Therefore, the latent image by the 1st convex part group or the 2nd convex part group comes to emerge by the difference in these colors. Here, in the present invention, a plurality of second color arrangement portions are provided in a matrix in the first color arrangement portion, and an arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion A first convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions forming rows and / or columns in parallel is formed, and the first convex portion group is configured in a region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion. Since the 2nd convex part group which consists of a plurality of convex parts which constituted a row and / or a column in parallel with the arrangement direction of a plurality of convex parts to be formed is formed, which direction makes an acute angle to the substrate surface Even when observed from the side surface of the plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface is hidden by the convex portions adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion, and only the top portion is visible Because of the difference between the color of the top of the first convex group and the color of the top of the second convex group Latent image by the first protrusion group or the second protruding portion group becomes visible emerged Te.
 このように、第1の配色部にこの第1の配色部とは色が異なる複数の第2の配色部がマトリックス状に設けられ、この第1の配色部の所定領域にて複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成した複数の凸部からなる第1の凸部群が形成されるとともに、第1の配色部における所定領域以外の領域にて第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成した複数の凸部からなる第2の凸部群が形成された構成としたため、基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、基材表面から突出した複数の凸部の側面が、その凸部の観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部のみが見えるような状態となり、観察方向に制限されることなく第1の凸部群または第2の凸部群による潜像が浮かび上がってその潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 In this way, the first color arrangement unit is provided with a plurality of second color arrangement units having a color different from that of the first color arrangement unit, and a plurality of second color arrangement units in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement unit. A first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions constituting rows and / or columns is formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the color arrangement portions, and the first color arrangement portion is formed in a region other than the predetermined region. Since the second convex portion group composed of a plurality of convex portions constituting rows and / or columns is formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of convex portions constituting one convex portion group, the substrate surface Even when observed from any direction that makes an acute angle, the side surfaces of the plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface are hidden by the convex portions adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions and become invisible. , Only the top is visible, the first is not limited to the viewing direction The authenticity discrimination due to the latent image can be easily performed latent image by parts group or the second protrusion group emerged.
 また、前記エンボス部は、平面部を具備する基材に、該平面部の法線方向に突出して形成された複数の凸部からなり、
 前記配色部は、
 前記複数の凸部毎に、当該凸部を取り囲むように前記平面部に設けられた複数の第1のマーク部と、
 前記複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられた第2のマーク部とを有する。
Further, the embossed portion is composed of a plurality of convex portions formed on a base material having a flat portion so as to protrude in the normal direction of the flat portion,
The color scheme is
For each of the plurality of convex portions, a plurality of first mark portions provided on the planar portion so as to surround the convex portion,
And a second mark portion provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材の平面部の法線方向から観察した場合、第1のマーク部が設けられた平面部は観察方向と対向するため、観察方向からの光がこの平面部に設けられた第1のマーク部上にて観察方向に反射し、第1のマーク部が明確に見える。一方、第2のマーク部が設けられた凸部の側面は観察方向に対向していないため、観察方向からの光がこの凸部の側面に設けられた第2のマーク部上にて観察方向以外の方向にも反射して分散してしまい、第2のマーク部が薄くしか見えない。そのため、基材の平面部の法線方向から観察した場合は、複数の凸部のうち第2のマーク部が設けられていない凸部においてはその周囲に設けられた第1のマーク部のみが視認され、複数の凸部のうち側面に第2のマーク部が設けられた凸部においても、第2のマーク部が薄くしか見えないのに対して第1のマーク部が明確に見えることによる錯覚によってほとんど第1のマーク部しか視認されない状態となる。また、この状態から基材に対する観察方向を基材の平面部の法線方向から変化させていくと、観察方向が、第2のマーク部が設けられた凸部の側面に対向するようになっていく。すると、観察方向からの光がこの凸部の側面に設けられた第2のマーク部上にて観察方向に反射し、第2のマーク部が明確に見えるようになる。一方、第1のマーク部が設けられた平面部は観察方向に対向しなくなるため、観察方向からの光がこの平面部に設けられた第1のマーク部上にて観察方向以外の方向にも反射して分散してしまい、第1のマーク部が薄くしか見えなくなっていく。そのため、複数の第2のマーク部を潜像となる所定の情報が表現されるように複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部に設けておけば、基材に対する観察方向を基材の平面部の法線方向から変化させていった場合、第2のマーク部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。ここで、本発明においては、第2のマーク部が、凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられているので、基材に対する観察方向を基材の平面部の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、第2のマーク部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when observed from the normal direction of the planar portion of the substrate, the planar portion provided with the first mark portion is opposed to the observation direction. Is reflected in the observation direction on the first mark portion provided on the plane portion, and the first mark portion can be clearly seen. On the other hand, since the side surface of the convex portion provided with the second mark portion does not face the observation direction, the light from the observation direction is observed on the second mark portion provided on the side surface of the convex portion. In other directions, the light is reflected and dispersed, and the second mark portion can be seen only thinly. Therefore, when observed from the normal direction of the planar portion of the base material, only the first mark portion provided around the convex portion where the second mark portion is not provided among the plurality of convex portions. Even in a convex portion that is visually recognized and provided with a second mark portion on the side surface among the plurality of convex portions, the second mark portion can only be seen thin, whereas the first mark portion can be clearly seen. Only the first mark portion is visually recognized by the illusion. Moreover, when the observation direction with respect to the base material is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion of the base material from this state, the observation direction comes to face the side surface of the convex portion provided with the second mark portion. To go. Then, the light from the observation direction is reflected in the observation direction on the second mark portion provided on the side surface of the convex portion, so that the second mark portion can be clearly seen. On the other hand, since the plane portion provided with the first mark portion does not face the observation direction, light from the observation direction is also emitted in directions other than the observation direction on the first mark portion provided on the plane portion. The light is reflected and dispersed, so that the first mark portion can be seen only thinly. Therefore, if the plurality of second mark portions are provided on a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions so that the predetermined information as a latent image is expressed, the observation direction with respect to the base material is set to the base material. When changing from the normal direction of the plane portion, the latent image by the second mark portion appears to appear. Here, in this invention, since the 2nd mark part is provided over the perimeter of the side surface of a convex part, in what direction the observation direction with respect to a base material is from the normal line direction of the plane part of a base material. Even if it is changed, the latent image by the second mark portion appears to appear.
 また、複数の凸部が近接している場合は、基材に対する観察方向を基材の平面部の法線方向から変化させていくと、平面部に設けられた第1のマーク部が、その第1のマーク部によって取り囲まれた凸部の観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなり、第2のマーク部による潜像のみが視認しやすくなる。 In addition, when the plurality of convex portions are close to each other, when the observation direction with respect to the base material is changed from the normal direction of the flat surface portion of the base material, the first mark portion provided on the flat surface portion becomes The convex portion surrounded by the first mark portion is hidden by the convex portion adjacent to the observation direction side, so that only the latent image by the second mark portion is easily visible.
 このように、観察方向を基材の平面部の法線方向から傾けていった場合に浮かび上がる潜像を構成する第2のマーク部が、基材に形成された凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられているため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像が浮かび上がり、潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 In this way, the second mark part constituting the latent image that emerges when the observation direction is tilted from the normal direction of the flat part of the base material is the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex part formed on the base material. Therefore, the latent image emerges without being limited to the observation direction, and authenticity determination based on the latent image can be easily performed.
 また、前記エンボス部は、基材表面から突出し、マトリックス状に形成された複数の凸部からなり、
 前記配色部は、
 前記複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部の前記基材表面から第1の高さとなる位置に設けられた第1のマーク部と、
 前記複数の凸部のうち前記第1のマーク部が設けられていない凸部の前記基材表面から前記第1の高さと異なる第2の高さとなる位置に設けられた第2のマーク部とを有し、
 前記第1のマーク部と前記第2のマーク部とは、相似形であり、少なくとも一方が前記凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられている。
Further, the embossed portion protrudes from the surface of the base material, and includes a plurality of convex portions formed in a matrix shape,
The color scheme is
A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first height from the surface of the base material of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions;
A second mark portion provided at a position having a second height different from the first height from the surface of the base material of the convex portion not provided with the first mark portion among the plurality of convex portions; Have
The first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar in shape, and at least one is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材を正面から観察した場合、複数の凸部に設けられた第1のマーク部及び第2のマーク部は、観察方向から遮るものが存在しないため、全ての第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部が視認される。第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とは、基材表面からの高さが互いに異なるものの、互いに相似形であり、かつその高さ方向から観察されているため、略同一の形状として認識され、それにより、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との区別がつきにくく、同一形状のマーク部が並んで形成されているものとして認識される。この状態から観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていき、基材表面に対する観察方向のなす角度が所定の角度よりも小さくなると、凸部に互いに高さが異なるように設けられた第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とのうち、凸部における高さが低い方のマーク部がその凸部の観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなり、それにより、凸部における高さが高い方のマーク部のみが視認可能となる。そのため、複数の第1のマーク部を潜像となる所定の情報が表現されるように複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部に設けておけば、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなす方向から観察した場合、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。ここで、本発明においては、互いに相似形の第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との少なくとも一方が凹部の側面の全周に渡って設けられ、かつ、複数の凸部がマトリックス状に形成されているので、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、凸部における高さが低い方のマーク部が観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなり、凸部における高さが高い方のマーク部のみが視認可能な状態となって第1のマーク部による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。また、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とは互いに相似形であるので、基材を正面から観察した場合に、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との区別がつきにくくなり、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像を認識困難とすることができる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when the substrate is observed from the front, the first mark portion and the second mark portion provided on the plurality of convex portions are not obstructed from the observation direction. Therefore, all the first mark portions and the second mark portions are visually recognized. Although the first mark portion and the second mark portion are different from each other in height from the substrate surface, they are similar to each other and are observed from the height direction, so that they are recognized as substantially the same shape. Thus, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion, and it is recognized that the mark portions having the same shape are formed side by side. From this state, the observation direction is changed to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, and when the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the substrate surface is smaller than a predetermined angle, the heights of the projections are different from each other. Of the first mark portion and the second mark portion provided, the lower mark portion of the convex portion is hidden by the convex portion adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion, thereby being invisible. Only the mark portion having the higher height at the convex portion is visible. Therefore, if a plurality of first mark portions are provided on a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions so that predetermined information serving as a latent image is expressed, a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface When the image is observed from a direction that makes a smaller angle, the latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear. Here, in the present invention, at least one of the first mark portion and the second mark portion that are similar to each other is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the recess, and the plurality of protrusions are arranged in a matrix. Since it is formed, even if it is a case where it observes from which direction which makes an angle smaller than a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface, the mark part with the lower height in the convex part is adjacent to the observation direction side. The convex portion hides and cannot be seen, and only the mark portion having a higher height in the convex portion is visible, and the latent image by the first mark portion appears to appear. In addition, since the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion when the substrate is observed from the front. The latent image using the first mark portion can be made difficult to recognize.
 このように、基材表面から突出した複数の凸部がマトリックス状に設けられ、この複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部の第1の高さとなる位置に第1のマーク部が設けられるとともに、複数の凸部のうち第1のマーク部が設けられていない凸部の側面の基材表面から第1の高さと異なる第2の高さとなる位置に第2のマーク部が設けられ、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とが互いに相似形であり、これらの少なくとも一方が凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられた構成としたため、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とのうち凸部における高さが低い方のマーク部のみが観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れて見えなくなり、観察方向に制限されることなく第1のマーク部を用いた潜像が浮かび上がってその潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。また、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とが互いに相似形であるため、基材を正面から観察した場合に、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との区別がつきにくくなり、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像を認識困難とすることができる。 As described above, a plurality of convex portions protruding from the substrate surface are provided in a matrix shape, and the first mark portion is provided at a position that is a first height of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions. And a second mark portion is provided at a position having a second height different from the first height from the base material surface on the side surface of the convex portion where the first mark portion is not provided among the plurality of convex portions. The first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, and at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion. Even in the case of observation from any direction that forms an angle smaller than the angle, only the mark portion with the lower height of the convex portion of the first mark portion and the second mark portion is adjacent to the observation direction side. Hidden by a convex part that is not visible and restricted to the viewing direction The authenticity discrimination due to the latent image can be easily performed emerged latent image using the first mark portion without Rukoto. In addition, since the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion when the substrate is observed from the front. The latent image using the first mark portion can be made difficult to recognize.
 また、前記エンボス部は、基材に側面を具備して形成された複数の凸部からなる第1及び第2の凸部群を有し、
 前記第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と、前記第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とは、同一方向から観察した場合における前記側面の前記配色部による配色割合が互いに異なる。
In addition, the embossed portion has a first and second convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions formed with a side surface on a base material,
The convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group have different coloration ratios due to the color arrangement portions on the side surfaces when observed from the same direction.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材を正面から観察した場合、側面の配色割合が互いに異なる第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とが識別可能となる場合があるものの、これら凸部の側面は観察方向に対向していないため、観察方向からの光が凸部の側面にて観察方向以外の方向にも反射して分散してしまい、凸部の側面の配色割合がはっきりとは視認されず、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部との識別が曖昧なものとなる。この状態から観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていくと、観察方向が複数の凸部の側面に対向するようになっていく。すると、観察方向からの光が凸部の側面にて観察方向に反射することになり、凸部の側面における配色割合が明確に視認される。そのため、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の配色割合と、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の配色割合との違いが明確に視認され、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とが、明確に識別されることになる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when the base material is observed from the front, the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the second convex portion group having different coloration ratios on the side surfaces are formed. The side surfaces of these convex portions are not opposed to the observation direction, but the light from the observation direction is reflected and dispersed by the side surfaces of the convex portions in directions other than the observation direction. Therefore, the coloration ratio of the side surfaces of the convex portions is not clearly recognized, and the distinction between the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group is ambiguous. Become. When the observation direction is changed from this state to a direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the observation direction is opposed to the side surfaces of the plurality of convex portions. Then, the light from the observation direction is reflected in the observation direction on the side surface of the convex portion, and the color arrangement ratio on the side surface of the convex portion is clearly visually recognized. Therefore, the difference between the color scheme ratio of the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the color scheme ratio of the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group is clearly visually recognized to constitute the first convex portion group. A convex part and the convex part which comprises the 2nd convex part group will be identified clearly.
 これにより、例えば、第1の凸部群によって文字部を構成し、第2の凸部群によって背景部を構成すれば、観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部の側面の配色割合による見え方が変化し、第2の凸部群による背景の中に、第1の凸部群による文字が明確に現れてくることになる。ここで、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とは、同一方向から観察した場合における側面の配色割合が互いに異なっているので、観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とが、明確に識別されることになる。 Thereby, for example, if a character part is comprised by the 1st convex part group and a background part is comprised by the 2nd convex part group, an observation direction will be changed to the direction which makes an acute angle with respect to a base-material surface. As a result, the appearance of the side surfaces of the plurality of convex portions changes depending on the coloration ratio, and the characters by the first convex portion group clearly appear in the background by the second convex portion group. Here, the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group have different coloration ratios on the side surfaces when observed from the same direction. Even if it is changed in any direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface, the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group are clear. Will be identified.
 このように、基材表面に側面を具備して形成された第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とが、同一方向から観察した場合における側面の配色割合が互いに異なる構成としたため、観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなすどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とが明確に識別されることになり、観察方向に制限されることなく真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 Thus, the side surface when the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group formed by providing the side surface on the base-material surface and the convex part which comprises the 2nd convex part group are observed from the same direction. Therefore, even if the observation direction is changed to any direction that forms an acute angle with respect to the surface of the base material, the convex portion and the second convex portion constituting the first convex portion group are arranged. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the authenticity without being limited to the observation direction.
 また、前記エンボス部は、基材表面から窪んで形成された複数の凹部からなり、
 前記配色部は、
 前記複数の凹部のうち予め決められた凹部の前記基材表面から第1の深さとなる位置に設けられた第1のマーク部と、
 前記第1のマーク部と相似形であり、前記複数の凹部のうち前記第1のマーク部が設けられていない凹部の前記基材表面から前記第1の深さと異なる第2の深さとなる位置に設けられた第2のマーク部とを有し、
 前記第1のマーク部と前記第2のマーク部との少なくとも一方は、前記凹部の内側面の全周に渡って設けられている。
Further, the embossed portion is composed of a plurality of concave portions formed to be recessed from the substrate surface,
The color scheme is
A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first depth from the surface of the base material of a predetermined recess among the plurality of recesses;
A position that is similar to the first mark portion and has a second depth different from the first depth from the surface of the base material of the concave portion in which the first mark portion is not provided among the plurality of concave portions. And a second mark portion provided in the
At least one of the first mark portion and the second mark portion is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess.
 上記のように構成された本発明においては、基材を正面から観察した場合、複数の凹部に設けられた第1のマーク部及び第2のマーク部は、観察方向から遮るものが存在しないため、全ての第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部が視認される。第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とは、基材表面からの深さが互いに異なるものの、互いに相似形であり、かつその深さ方向にて観察されているため、略同一の形状として認識され、それにより、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との区別がつきにくく、同一形状のマーク部が並んで形成されているものとして認識される。この状態から観察方向を基材表面に対して鋭角をなす方向に変化させていき、基材表面に対する観察方向のなす角度が所定の角度よりも小さくなると、凹部に互いに深さが異なるように設けられた第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とのうち、凹部における深さが深い方のマーク部がその凹部の観察方向側の基材表面によって隠れて見えなくなり、それにより、凹部における深さが浅い方のマーク部のみが視認可能となる。そのため、複数の第1のマーク部を潜像となる所定の情報が表現されるように複数の凹部のうち予め決められた凹部に設けておけば、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなす方向から観察した場合、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。ここで、本発明においては、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とが互いに相似形であり、それらの少なくとも一方が、凹部の内側面の全周に渡って設けられているので、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。また、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部とは互いに相似形であるので、基材を正面から観察した場合に、第1のマーク部と第2のマーク部との区別がつきにくくなり、第1のマーク部を用いた潜像を認識困難とすることができる。 In the present invention configured as described above, when the substrate is observed from the front, the first mark portion and the second mark portion provided in the plurality of recesses are not obstructed from the observation direction. All the first mark portions and the second mark portions are visually recognized. Although the first mark portion and the second mark portion have different depths from the surface of the base material, they are similar to each other and are observed in the depth direction, so that they have substantially the same shape. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion, and it is recognized that the mark portions having the same shape are formed side by side. From this state, the observation direction is changed to a direction that makes an acute angle with respect to the substrate surface. Of the first mark portion and the second mark portion thus formed, the deeper mark portion in the recess is hidden by the surface of the base material on the observation direction side of the recess, so that the depth in the recess is reduced. Only the shallower mark is visible. For this reason, if a plurality of first mark portions are provided in a predetermined concave portion among the plurality of concave portions so that predetermined information serving as a latent image is expressed, it is more than a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface. When observed from a direction forming a small angle, the latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear. Here, in the present invention, the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, and at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess. The latent image using the first mark portion appears to appear when viewed from any direction that forms an angle smaller than a predetermined angle with respect to the material surface. In addition, since the first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar to each other, it is difficult to distinguish between the first mark portion and the second mark portion when the substrate is observed from the front. The latent image using the first mark portion can be made difficult to recognize.
 このように、基材表面に対して所定の角度よりも小さな角度をなすどの方向から観察した場合に浮かび上がる潜像を構成する第1のマーク部及び第2のマーク部が互いに相似形であり、かつ、そのうち少なくとも一方が基材に形成された凹部の内側面の全周に渡って設けられているため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像が浮かび上がり、潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 Thus, the first mark portion and the second mark portion constituting the latent image that emerges when observed from any direction that forms an angle smaller than a predetermined angle with respect to the substrate surface are similar to each other. And since at least one of them is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess formed in the base material, the latent image emerges without being restricted in the observation direction, and authenticity determination by the latent image is performed. It can be done easily.
本発明の偽造防止媒体の第1の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 1st Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図1aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図1bに示したX-X’断面図である。FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line X-X ′ shown in FIG. 図1bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. 図1bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. 図1bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. 図1bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートを正面から視認した場合の作用を説明するための図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の凸部の状態を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の凸部の状態を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の偽造防止構造全体の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の凸部の状態を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from a direction B in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の凸部の状態を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a state of a convex portion when the anti-counterfeit sheet illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from a direction B in FIG. 1b. 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シートに対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の偽造防止構造全体の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の他の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet | seat used as other embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図4aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 4a. 図4bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 4b. 図4bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 4b. 図4bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 4b. 図4bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 4b. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第3の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 3rd Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図5aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図5bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 5b. 図5bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 5b. 図5bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 5b. 図5bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 5b. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第4の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 4th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図6aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 6a. 図6bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 6b. 図6bに示した凸部の平面図である。It is a top view of the convex part shown in Drawing 6b. 図6bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 6b. 図6bに示した凸部の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。It is the perspective view seen from the A direction in the figure of the convex part shown in FIG. 6b. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第5の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 5th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図7aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図7bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 図7bに示したB-B’断面図である。FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 7B. 潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image. 第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための図である。FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an action when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に第1の凸部群を構成する凸部について側面方向から見た図である。FIG. 7 is a view of the protrusions constituting the first protrusion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に第2の凸部群を構成する凸部について側面方向から見た図である。FIG. 7 is a view of the protrusions constituting the second protrusion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートにおける偽造防止構造の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートにおける偽造防止構造の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートにおける偽造防止構造の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シートにおける偽造防止構造の見え方を示す図である。FIG. 7B is a view showing how the anti-counterfeit structure is visible in the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第6の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 6th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図10aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図10bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 10B. 図10bに示したB-B’断面図である。FIG. 10B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 10B. 潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image. 第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第7の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 7th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図11aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 11a. 図11bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 図11bに示したB-B’断面図である。FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 11B. 潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image. 第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第8の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the whole structure of the forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 8th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図12aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図12bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 図12bに示したB-B’断面図である。FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B ′ illustrated in FIG. 12B. 潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group for expressing a latent image. 第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises a 2nd convex part group. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第9の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 9th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図13aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図13bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ illustrated in FIG. 13B. 図13bに示した内マークが設けられた凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part provided with the inner mark shown in FIG. 13b. 図13bに示した内マークが設けられていない凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the inner mark shown in FIG. 13b is not provided. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 13 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing light reflection in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E is observed from the front. 図15aに示した光の反射による外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows how the outer periphery mark and inner mark look by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 15a. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造における外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing light reflection in the anti-counterfeit structure when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. 図16aに示した光の反射による外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows how the outer periphery mark and inner mark look by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 16a. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造における外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造における外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造における外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造における外周マーク及び内マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 13B is a diagram showing how the outer periphery mark and the inner mark are seen in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第10の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 10th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図17aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図17bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 17B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ illustrated in FIG. 17B. 図17bに示した文字部マークが設けられた凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the character part mark shown in FIG. 17b was provided. 図17bに示した背景部マークが設けられた凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part in which the background part mark shown in FIG. 17b was provided. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 18 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 18 is a view for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図である。FIG. 18 is a view seen from the cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E is observed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図である。FIG. 18 is a view seen from a cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に背景部マークが見えなくなる時の平面部に対する観察方向の角度θ1を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an angle θ 1 of the observation direction with respect to the flat surface when the background mark becomes invisible when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E is changed from the front. 図20bに示した角度θ1にて文字部マークを見た状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the character part mark at angle (theta) 1 shown in FIG. 20b. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合における偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合における偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合における偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合における偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 18B is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第11の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 11th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図21aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図21bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 図21bに示した第1の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 1st convex part group shown in FIG. 21b. 図21bに示した第2の凸部群を構成する凸部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the convex part which comprises the 2nd convex part group shown to FIG. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the first convex group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. 図22aに示した光の反射によるマークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows how the mark looks by reflection of the light shown to FIG. 22a. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための第2の凸部群を構成する凸部における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. 図22cに示した光の反射によるマークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the appearance of the mark by reflection of the light shown in FIG. 22c. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートの偽造防止構造におけるマークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a view showing how the mark is seen in the forgery prevention structure of the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の第1の凸部群を構成する凸部における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the first convex group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の第2の凸部群を構成する凸部における光の反射を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造におけるマークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造におけるマークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造におけるマークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造におけるマークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 22 is a diagram showing how the mark looks in the forgery prevention structure when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. 本発明の偽造防止媒体の第12の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the whole forgery prevention sheet | seat used as 12th Embodiment of the forgery prevention medium of this invention. 図24aに示した偽造防止構造の詳細な構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of the forgery prevention structure shown to FIG. 図24bに示したA-A’断面図である。FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ shown in FIG. 図24bに示した文字部マークが設けられた凹部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the recessed part in which the character part mark shown in FIG. 24b was provided. 図24bに示した背景部マークが設けられた凹部の構成を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the structure of the recessed part in which the background part mark shown in FIG. 24b was provided. 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e. 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シートの製造方法を説明するための図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining a method of manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e. 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図である。FIG. 25 is a view seen from the cross-sectional direction for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front. 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シートを正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。FIG. 25 is a diagram showing how the character part mark and the background part mark appear in the forgery prevention structure when the forgery prevention sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front. 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シートに対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図である。FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction of the anti-counterfeit sheet shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front. 図27aに示した背景部マークが見えなくなる時の平面部に対する観察方向の角度θ1を示す図である。It is a figure which shows angle (theta) 1 of the observation direction with respect to a plane part when the background part mark shown in FIG. 27a becomes invisible. 図27bに示した角度θ1にて文字部マークを見た状態を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the state which looked at the character part mark at angle (theta) 1 shown in FIG. 27b. 偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. 偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. 偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure. 偽造防止構造における文字部マーク及び背景部マークの見え方を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark and background part mark in a forgery prevention structure.
 以下に、本発明の実施の形態について図面を参照して説明する。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
 (第1の実施の形態)
 図1aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第1の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図1bは、図1aに示した偽造防止構造10の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図1cは、図1bに示したX-X’断面図であり、図1dは、図1bに示した凸部13の平面図であり、図1eは、図1bに示した凸部14の平面図であり、図1fは、図1bに示した凸部13の図中A方向から見た斜視図であり、図1gは、図1bに示した凸部14の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。
(First embodiment)
FIG. 1a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a first embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 1b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 10 shown in FIG. 1a. 1c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX ′ shown in FIG. 1b, FIG. 1d is a plan view of the convex portion 13 shown in FIG. 1b, and FIG. 1e is shown in FIG. 1b. Fig. 1f is a perspective view of the convex portion 13 shown in Fig. 1b as viewed from the direction A in Fig. 1g, and Fig. 1g is a perspective view of the convex portion 14 shown in Fig. 1b. It is the perspective view seen from the direction.
 本形態の偽造防止シート1は図1a~図1gに示すように、紙からなるシート基材2の一部の領域に偽造防止構造10が設けられて構成されている。シート基材2は、基材表面となる平面部3を有し、この平面部3の一部の領域に情報印刷領域4が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造10が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート1は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域4に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材2の情報印刷領域4に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材2に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造10による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 As shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g, the forgery prevention sheet 1 of the present embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 10 in a partial region of a sheet base 2 made of paper. The sheet base material 2 has a flat surface portion 3 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 4 is provided in a partial region of the flat surface portion 3 and a forgery prevention structure 10 is provided in another region. . The anti-counterfeit sheet 1 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 4. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 2 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary not to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 10.
 シート基材2に設けられた偽造防止構造10には、図1bに示すように、シート基材2の平面部3のベース色と同一の白色からなる第1の配色部である背景色領域12上に、背景色領域12とは異なる黒色からなる複数の第2の配色部である周期配色領域11が設けられて表示部が構成されている。この複数の周期配色領域11は、背景色領域12上に行及び列を構成して一定周期で設けられることによりマトリックス状となっている。 The anti-counterfeit structure 10 provided on the sheet base material 2 includes a background color region 12 which is a first color arrangement portion having the same white color as the base color of the flat surface portion 3 of the sheet base material 2 as shown in FIG. On top of this, a periodic color arrangement region 11 which is a plurality of second color arrangement portions made of black different from the background color region 12 is provided to constitute a display unit. The plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 are formed in a matrix by forming rows and columns on the background color region 12 and being provided with a constant period.
 複数の周期配色領域11がマトリックス状に設けられた領域には、第1の凸部群を構成するエンボス部である複数の第1の凸部13と、第2の凸部群を構成するエンボス部である複数の第2の凸部14とが形成されている。これら凸部13,14は図1c、図1f及び図1gに示すように、円錐から頂点の部分が取り除かれた形状であって、シート基材2をエンボス版等で平面部3側から0.05~0.1mm程度窪ませることにより側面13a,14aが形成され、平面部3との同一面が頂部13b,14bとなっている。そして、この頂部13b,14bからシート基材の窪み方向に向かうに従ってその断面積が徐々に広くなり、凸部13,14の底部においては、直径が0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。 In the region in which the plurality of periodic coloration regions 11 are provided in a matrix, the plurality of first convex portions 13 that are embossed portions constituting the first convex portion group and the embossed portions constituting the second convex portion group A plurality of second convex portions 14 that are portions are formed. As shown in FIGS. 1c, 1f, and 1g, these convex portions 13 and 14 have a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone. Side surfaces 13a and 14a are formed by being recessed by about 05 to 0.1 mm, and the same surface as the flat portion 3 is the top portions 13b and 14b. The cross-sectional area gradually increases from the top portions 13b and 14b toward the recess direction of the sheet base material, and the bottom portions of the convex portions 13 and 14 have a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less.
 第1の凸部群を構成する第1の凸部13は、第1の凸部群の形状によって潜像となる「T」の字を表現するように背景色領域12の所定領域に形成されている。また、この凸部13は、複数の周期配色領域11と同じ周期で形成されており、「T」の字を形成するための行及び列の方向は、複数の周期配色領域11の配列方向と並行しているが、その行及び列は、複数の周期配色領域11の行及び列に対してずれている。それにより、図1cに示すように、シート基材2の表面に平行な中心線にて分離された場合における一方の領域においては、周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きく、また、他方の領域においては、背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きいという、中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積が互いに異なるようになっている。なお、図1cにおいては、図1b中A方向から凸部13を視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線を図示しているが、この中心線はシート基材2の表面に平行であれば凸部13にて任意に設定でき、凸部13は、その任意に設定された中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積が互いに異なるようになっている。 The first convex portion 13 constituting the first convex portion group is formed in a predetermined region of the background color region 12 so as to express the letter “T” that becomes a latent image by the shape of the first convex portion group. ing. The convex portions 13 are formed in the same cycle as the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11, and the row and column directions for forming the letter “T” are the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Although parallel, the rows and columns are shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 1 c, in one region when separated by a center line parallel to the surface of the sheet substrate 2, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12. In the other region, the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11, and each of the two regions separated by the center line includes the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12; The areas are different from each other. In FIG. 1 c, a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when the convex portion 13 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1 b is illustrated, but this center line is parallel to the surface of the sheet base material 2. The convex portion 13 can be arbitrarily set, and the convex portion 13 is configured such that the areas of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 are different from each other in two regions separated by the arbitrarily set center line. It has become.
 また、第2の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部14は、背景色領域12にて第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部13が形成された領域を取り囲むように形成されている。また、この凸部14は、複数の周期配色領域11と同じ周期で形成されており、その行及び列の方向は、複数の周期配色領域11の配列方向と並行しているが、その行及び列は、複数の周期配色領域11の行及び列に対してずれている。それにより、図1dに示すように、シート基材2の表面に平行な中心線にて分離された場合における一方の領域においては、背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きく、また、他方の領域においては、周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きいという、中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積が互いに異なるようになっている。なお、図1dにおいては、図1b中A方向から凸部14を視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線を図示しているが、この中心線はシート基材2の表面に平行であれば凸部14にて任意に設定でき、凸部14は、その任意に設定された中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積が互いに異なるようになっている。また、複数の凸部14の行及び列は、複数の凸部13の行及び列に対してもずれている。 Further, the plurality of convex portions 14 constituting the second convex portion group are formed so as to surround an area where the plurality of convex portions 13 constituting the first convex portion group are formed in the background color region 12. Yes. The convex portions 14 are formed in the same cycle as the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11, and the row and column directions thereof are parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. The columns are shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 1 d, in one region when separated by a center line parallel to the surface of the sheet substrate 2, the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11. In the other region, the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 are respectively divided into two regions separated by the center line, in which the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12. The areas are different from each other. In FIG. 1 d, a center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when the convex portion 14 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1 b is illustrated, but this center line is parallel to the surface of the sheet base material 2. The convex portion 14 can be arbitrarily set, and the convex portion 14 has different areas of the periodic coloration region 11 and the background color region 12 in each of the two regions separated by the arbitrarily set center line. It has become. Further, the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 14 are also shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 13.
 このように構成された複数の凸部13,14は、図1c及び図1dに示すように、互いに平行となる中心線を介した同一方向側の領域では、凸部13と凸部14とで、周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積の大小関係が逆転している。具体的には、凸部13の中心線を介して図中左上側の領域においては、図1cに示すように周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きく、凸部14の中心線を介して図中左上側の領域においては、図1dに示すように背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きくなっており、また、凸部13の中心線を介して図中右下側の領域においては、図1cに示すように背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きく、凸部14の中心線を介して図中右下側の領域においては、図1dに示すように周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きくなっている。 As shown in FIGS. 1 c and 1 d, the plurality of convex portions 13 and 14 configured in this way are formed by the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 in a region on the same direction side through a center line that is parallel to each other. The area size relationship between the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 is reversed. Specifically, in the upper left region in the figure through the center line of the convex portion 13, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12 as shown in FIG. In the upper left region in the figure through the center line, the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic coloration region 11 as shown in FIG. In the lower right area in the figure, the area of the background color area 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement area 11 as shown in FIG. 1c, and the lower right area in the figure via the center line of the convex portion 14 In FIG. 1D, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12 as shown in FIG.
 なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造10は、説明を簡単にするために100個の周期配色領域11が10×10のマトリックス状に形成されたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造10によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 Note that the forgery prevention structure 10 illustrated in the present embodiment has 100 periodic coloration regions 11 formed in a 10 × 10 matrix for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but if the number is increased, The more the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the anti-counterfeit structure 10 can be made finer, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート1の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 configured as described above will be described.
 まず、シート基材2の偽造防止構造10が設けられる領域、すなわち、白色の背景色領域12となる領域に、100個の周期配色領域11を10×10のマトリックス状に黒色で印刷する。なお、この周期配色領域11の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, 100 periodic color arrangement regions 11 are printed in black in a 10 × 10 matrix shape in an area where the anti-counterfeit structure 10 of the sheet base material 2 is provided, that is, an area which becomes a white background color area 12. The printing of the periodic color arrangement region 11 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
 次に、周期配色領域11が印刷された領域に、シート基材2の平面部3側からエンボス版を押し付けることによって第1の凸部群を構成する凸部13と、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部14とを形成する。第1の凸部群を構成する凸部13は、周期配色領域11が印刷された領域のうち、潜像となる「T」を形成する所定領域にて複数の周期配色領域11と同じ周期で、複数の周期配色領域11の配列方向と並行し、かつ、複数の周期配色領域11の行及び列に対してずれた行及び列を構成するように形成する。また、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部14は、周期配色領域11が印刷された領域のうち、第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部13が形成された領域を取り囲むように、複数の周期配色領域11と同じ周期で、複数の周期配色領域11の配列方向と並行し、かつ、複数の周期配色領域11、並びに複数の凸部13の行及び列に対してずれた行及び列を構成するように形成する。このような凸部13,14は、凸部13が複数の周期配色領域11間に配置され、凸部14が複数の周期配色領域11上に配置されるようなエンボス版を、シート基材2に対して、複数の凸部13,14の行及び列と周期配色領域11の行及び列とが互いに平行となりながらずれるようにずらすことにより形成することが考えられる。 Next, the convex part 13 which comprises a 1st convex part group by pressing an embossing plate from the plane part 3 side of the sheet base material 2 to the area | region where the periodic coloration area | region 11 was printed, and 2nd convex part group The convex part 14 which comprises is formed. The convex portions 13 constituting the first convex portion group have the same period as that of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 in a predetermined region that forms “T” serving as a latent image among the regions in which the periodic color arrangement regions 11 are printed. The rows and columns are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and shifted from the rows and columns of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. Moreover, the convex part 14 which comprises a 2nd convex part group surrounds the area | region in which the some convex part 13 which comprises a 1st convex part group was formed among the area | regions where the periodic coloration area | region 11 was printed. In addition, in the same period as the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11, parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and shifted with respect to the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 13. Form rows and columns. Such convex portions 13 and 14 are formed of an embossed plate in which the convex portion 13 is disposed between the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 and the convex portion 14 is disposed on the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11. On the other hand, it can be considered that the rows and columns of the plurality of convex portions 13 and 14 and the rows and columns of the periodic coloration region 11 are shifted so as to be shifted while being parallel to each other.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート1が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材2の情報印刷領域4に印刷されて使用されることになる。 The anti-counterfeit sheet 1 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2 and used.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート1の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the above-described anti-counterfeit sheet 1 will be described.
 まず、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1を正面、すなわち、シート基材2の平面部3の法線方向から視認した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 3 of the sheet substrate 2 will be described.
 図2は、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1を正面から視認した場合の作用を説明するための図であり、偽造防止構造10の見え方を示す。 FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front, and shows how the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is seen.
 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1を、正面、すなわち平面部3の法線方向から視認した場合、図2に示すように、偽造防止構造10においては、背景色領域12が白色であるのに対してこの背景色領域12にマトリックス状に設けられた複数の周期配色領域11が黒色であることから、マトリックス状の複数の周期配色領域11が認識される。この際、シート基材2には、複数の凸部13,14が形成されているが、偽造防止シート1を正面から視認した場合は、この凸部13,14の頂部13b,14b側から底部側に向かって視認することになるため、凸部13,14が認識されにくく、複数の周期配色領域11がマトリックス状に認識されるだけとなり、潜像「T」は浮かび上がって見えてこない。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is viewed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the plane portion 3, the anti-counterfeit structure 10 has a white background color region 12 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, since the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 provided in a matrix in the background color region 12 are black, the plurality of matrix periodic color arrangement regions 11 are recognized. At this time, a plurality of convex portions 13 and 14 are formed on the sheet base material 2. When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 is viewed from the front, the bottom portion from the top portions 13b and 14b of the convex portions 13 and 14 is obtained. Since the convex portions 13 and 14 are not easily recognized, the plurality of periodic color arrangement regions 11 are only recognized in a matrix shape, and the latent image “T” does not appear to appear.
 次に、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対する視認方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材2の平面部3の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, an operation in the case where the viewing direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 3 of the sheet base material 2 will be described.
 図3aは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の凸部13の状態を示す図であり、図3bは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の凸部14の状態を示す図であり、図3cは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中A方向から視認した場合の偽造防止構造10全体の見え方を示す図であり、図3dは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の凸部13の状態を示す図であり、図3eは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の凸部14の状態を示す図であり、図3fは、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対して図1b中B方向から視認した場合の偽造防止構造10全体の見え方を示す図である。なお、図3a~図3fにおいては、本形態における作用をわかりやすくするために凸部13,14以外の領域における周期配色領域11及び背景色領域12の記載を省略している。 FIG. 3a is a diagram showing a state of the convex portion 13 when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1b with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g, and FIG. 3b is shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a state of the convex portion 14 when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1B with respect to the illustrated anti-counterfeit sheet 1, and FIG. 3C is a diagram illustrating the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 illustrated in FIGS. 1a to 1g. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing how the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is viewed when viewed from the A direction in 1b, and FIG. 3D shows the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b. FIG. 3e is a diagram showing the state of the convex portion 14 when viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g. FIG. 3f shows the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. It is a diagram illustrating a forgery prevention structure 10 overall appearance of when observed from the medium B direction. In FIGS. 3a to 3f, the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the background color region 12 in regions other than the convex portions 13 and 14 are omitted for easy understanding of the operation in this embodiment.
 図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対する視認方向を正面から図1b中A方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部13,14のそれぞれの視認方向側、すなわち図1b中A側の側面13a,14aと頂部13b,14bのみが見えるようになっていく。すると、図1cに示したように、複数の凸部13においては、図1b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きく、また、図1dに示したように、複数の凸部14においては、図1b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きいため、図3a及び図3bに示すように、凸部13と凸部14とでは、視認方向側の全体において周期配色領域11の色と背景色領域12の色とによって見える色が互いに異なることになる。具体的には、凸部13を図1b中A方向から視認した場合は、黒色からなる周期配色領域11の面積が白色からなる背景色領域12の面積よりも大きいことから濃い灰色に見え、凸部14を図1b中A方向から視認した場合は、白色からなる背景色領域12の面積が黒色からなる周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きいことから淡い灰色に見えることになる。 When the viewing direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is changed from the front to the A direction in FIG. 1b, the viewing direction side of each of the plurality of convex portions 13 and 14, that is, the A side in FIG. Only the side surfaces 13a and 14a and the top portions 13b and 14b are visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 1c, in the plurality of convex portions 13, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. The area of the periodic coloration region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12, and as shown in FIG. 1d, the plurality of convex portions 14 are orthogonal to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 1b. Since the area of the background color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 in the region on the viewing direction side when separated by the center line, as shown in FIG. 3a and FIG. And the convex portion 14 have different colors that can be seen depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the color of the background color region 12 on the entire viewing direction side. Specifically, when the convex portion 13 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 12 made of white, so that the color appears dark gray. When the portion 14 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 1b, the area of the background color region 12 made of white is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black, so that the portion 14 looks light gray.
 それにより、図3cに示すように、偽造防止構造10の全体としては、図1b中A方向から視認した場合、複数の凸部14による淡い灰色の背景の中に、複数の凸部13による濃い灰色の潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 As a result, as shown in FIG. 3c, the anti-counterfeit structure 10 as a whole is darker than the light gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 14 when viewed from the direction A in FIG. A gray latent image “T” emerges and appears.
 また、図1a~図1gに示した偽造防止シート1に対する視認方向を正面から図1b中B方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部13,14のそれぞれの視認方向側、すなわち図1b中B側の側面13a,14aと頂部13b,14bのみが見えるようになっていく。すると、図1cに示したように複数の凸部13においては、図1b中B方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側の領域においては、背景色領域12の面積が周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きく、また、図1dに示したように複数の凸部14においては、図1b中B方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側の領域においては、周期配色領域11の面積が背景色領域12の面積よりも大きいため、図3d及び図3eに示すように、凸部13と凸部14とでは、視認方向側の全体において周期配色領域11の色と背景色領域12の色とによって見える色が互いに異なることになる。具体的には、凸部13を図1b中B方向から視認した場合は、白色からなる背景色領域12の面積が黒色からなる周期配色領域11の面積よりも大きいことから淡い灰色に見え、凸部14を図1b中B方向から視認した場合は、黒色からなる周期配色領域11の面積が白色からなる背景色領域12の面積よりも大きいことから濃い灰色に見えることになる。 Further, when the viewing direction of the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g is changed from the front to the B direction in FIG. 1b, the respective viewing direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 13 and 14, that is, in FIG. Only the side surfaces 13a, 14a and the top portions 13b, 14b on the B side become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 1c, in the plurality of convex portions 13, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line orthogonal to the viewing direction when viewed from the B direction in FIG. The area of the color region 12 is larger than the area of the periodic coloration region 11, and as shown in FIG. 1d, the plurality of convex portions 14 are center lines perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the B direction in FIG. In the region on the viewing direction side when separated by, since the area of the periodic coloration region 11 is larger than the area of the background color region 12, as shown in FIG. 3d and FIG. Therefore, the colors that can be seen by the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11 and the color of the background color region 12 are different from each other on the entire viewing direction side. Specifically, when the convex portion 13 is viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1B, the area of the background color region 12 made of white is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black, and thus appears light gray, When the part 14 is viewed from the B direction in FIG. 1b, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 11 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 12 made of white, so that it looks dark gray.
 それにより、図3fに示すように、偽造防止構造10の全体としては、図1b中B方向から視認した場合、複数の凸部14による濃い灰色の背景の中に、複数の凸部13による淡い灰色の潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 As a result, as shown in FIG. 3f, the anti-counterfeit structure 10 as a whole is lightly formed by the plurality of protrusions 13 in the dark gray background of the plurality of protrusions 14 when viewed from the B direction in FIG. A gray latent image “T” emerges and appears.
 以上、図1に示した偽造防止構造10を図1b中A方向及びB方向から視認した場合について説明したが、上述したように、凸部13,14は、平面部3に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで周期配色領域11と背景色領域12との面積が互いに異なるように形成され、かつ、凸部13と凸部14とでは、その面積の大小関係が中心線を介した同一方向側の領域において互いに逆転しているので、偽造防止構造10を平面部3に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から視認した場合であっても、凸部13と凸部14とでは、背景色領域12の色と周期配色領域11の色とによって見える色が互いに異なり、その違いによって、潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。また、上述したように、視認する方向によって、凸部13,14のそれぞれにおいて中心線を介して視認方向側における背景色領域12と周期配色領域11との面積の大小関係が変化するため、浮かび上がる潜像と背景との色の関係が変化し、潜像を認識しやすくなる。 As described above, the case where the forgery prevention structure 10 shown in FIG. 1 is viewed from the A direction and the B direction in FIG. 1B has been described. However, as described above, the convex portions 13 and 14 have arbitrary centers parallel to the plane portion 3. Each of the two regions separated by the line is formed so that the areas of the periodic coloration region 11 and the background color region 12 are different from each other, and the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 have a relationship in size. In the region on the same direction side through the center line, the anti-counterfeit structure 10 is viewed from any direction that makes an acute angle with respect to the flat surface portion 3. The colors that can be seen by the color of the background color area 12 and the color of the periodic color arrangement area 11 are different from each other, and the latent image appears to appear due to the difference. Further, as described above, since the size relationship between the background color region 12 and the periodic coloration region 11 on the viewing direction side changes through the center line in each of the convex portions 13 and 14 depending on the viewing direction, the surface area changes. The relationship between the color of the rising latent image and the background changes, and it becomes easier to recognize the latent image.
 上述した偽造防止シート1は、複写した場合、シート基材2の情報印刷領域4に印刷された情報や、シート基材2に印刷によりマトリックス状に設けられた周期配色領域11は複写されるものの、凸部13,14までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の視認方向を変えていった場合であっても、複数の凸部13からなる第1の凸部群による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート1においては、偽造防止シート1に対する視認方向をシート基材2の平面部3の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、複数の凸部13からなる第1の凸部群による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、視認方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。なお、偽造防止シート1に対する視認方向によっては、凸部13と凸部14とで背景色領域12の色と周期配色領域11の色とによって見える色の差があまりない場合が生じるが、その視認方向は一部であるため、それによって偽造防止機能を失うことはない。また、凸部13,14が、シート基材2の平面部3を窪ませることによって形成されているため、シート基材2を表裏から見た場合や、直接触れた場合において、凸部13,14が認識されにくく、凸部13,14が再現しにくいものとなり、偽造防止機能を向上させることができる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 4 of the sheet base material 2 and the periodic color arrangement area 11 provided in a matrix by printing on the sheet base material 2 are copied. The convex portions 13 and 14 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the viewing direction of the copy is changed, the latent image formed by the first convex portion group composed of the plurality of convex portions 13 does not appear, thereby enabling authenticity determination. Become. Thus, when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 1 of this embodiment, when the viewing direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 3 of the sheet base material 2 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 13 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is true or false without being limited to the viewing direction. Depending on the viewing direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1, there may be a case where there is not much difference in color between the convex portion 13 and the convex portion 14 depending on the color of the background color region 12 and the color of the periodic color arrangement region 11. Since the direction is partial, it will not lose its anti-counterfeit function. Moreover, since the convex parts 13 and 14 are formed by denting the plane part 3 of the sheet | seat base material 2, when the sheet base material 2 is seen from the front and back, or when it touches directly, the convex part 13, 14 is difficult to be recognized, and the convex portions 13 and 14 are difficult to reproduce, and the forgery prevention function can be improved.
 (第2の実施の形態)
 図4aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の他の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図4bは、図4aに示した偽造防止構造110の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図4cは、図4bに示した凸部113の平面図であり、図4dは、図4bに示した凸部114の平面図であり、図4eは、図4bに示した凸部113の図中A方向から見た斜視図であり、図4fは、図4bに示した凸部114の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。
(Second Embodiment)
FIG. 4a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as another embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 4b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 110 shown in FIG. 4a. 4c is a plan view of the protrusion 113 shown in FIG. 4b, FIG. 4d is a plan view of the protrusion 114 shown in FIG. 4b, and FIG. 4e is a protrusion shown in FIG. 4b. 4f is a perspective view of the portion 113 as viewed from the direction A in the drawing, and FIG. 4f is a perspective view of the convex portion 114 shown in FIG. 4b as viewed from the direction A in the drawing.
 本形態は図4a~図4fに示すように、図1a~図1gに示したものに対して、シート基材102の偽造防止構造110となる領域に黒色で背景色領域112が設けられ、この背景色領域112に白色の周期配色領域111がマトリックス状に設けられている点のみが異なるものである。すなわち、図1a~図1gに示したものに対して、背景色領域112の色と周期配色領域111の色とが反転しているものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4a to 4f, a black background color region 112 is provided in the region that becomes the forgery prevention structure 110 of the sheet base material 102, as shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g. The only difference is that the white periodic coloration region 111 is provided in a matrix in the background color region 112. That is, the color of the background color area 112 and the color of the periodic color arrangement area 111 are reversed with respect to those shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート101においては、正面から見た場合は、黒色の背景色領域112にマトリックス状に設けられた周期配色領域111が白色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート101に対する視認方向を正面から例えば図4b中A方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部113,114のそれぞれの視認方向側、すなわち図4b中A側の側面113a,114aと頂部113b,114bのみが見えるようになっていく。すると、図4cに示すように、複数の凸部113においては、図4b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、周期配色領域111の面積が背景色領域112の面積よりも大きく、また、図4dに示すように、複数の凸部114においては、図4b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、背景色領域112の面積が周期配色領域111の面積よりも大きいため、図4e及び図4fに示すように、凸部113と凸部114とでは、視認方向側の全体において周期配色領域111の色と背景色領域112の色とによって見える色が互いに異なることになる。具体的には、凸部113を図4b中A方向から視認した場合は、白色からなる周期配色領域111の面積が黒色からなる背景色領域112の面積よりも大きいことから淡い灰色に見え、凸部114を図4b中A方向から視認した場合は、黒色からなる背景色領域112の面積が白色からなる周期配色領域111の面積よりも大きいことから濃い灰色に見えることになる。それにより、偽造防止構造110の全体としては、図4b中A方向から視認した場合、複数の凸部114による濃い灰色の背景の中に、複数の凸部113による淡い灰色の潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 101 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the periodic image area 111 provided in a matrix on the black background color area 112 is recognized as white, and the latent image “T "Is not recognized. And if the visual recognition direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 101 is changed from the front to, for example, the A direction in FIG. 4B, the respective visual recognition direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 113, 114, that is, the side surfaces 113a, 114a on the A side in FIG. Only the top portions 113b and 114b are visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 4 c, in the plurality of convex portions 113, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 4 b, The area of the periodic coloration region 111 is larger than the area of the background color region 112, and as shown in FIG. 4d, the plurality of convex portions 114 have a center perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 4b. In the region on the viewing direction side when separated by lines, the area of the background color region 112 is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 111. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 4e and FIG. In the portion 114, the colors that are visible depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 111 and the color of the background color region 112 are different from each other on the entire viewing direction side. Specifically, when the convex portion 113 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 4B, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 111 made of white is larger than the area of the background color region 112 made of black, and thus appears light gray, When the portion 114 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 4B, the area of the background color region 112 made of black is larger than the area of the periodic color arrangement region 111 made of white, so that the portion 114 looks dark gray. Thereby, as a whole of the anti-counterfeit structure 110, when viewed from the direction A in FIG. 4B, a light gray latent image “T” formed by the plurality of protrusions 113 in a dark gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 114. Appears to appear.
 (第3の実施の形態)
 図5aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第3の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図5bは、図5aに示した偽造防止構造210の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図5cは、図5bに示した凸部213の平面図であり、図5dは、図5bに示した凸部214の平面図であり、図5eは、図5bに示した凸部213の図中A方向から見た斜視図であり、図5fは、図5bに示した凸部214の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。
(Third embodiment)
FIG. 5a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a third embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 5b is a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 210 shown in FIG. 5a. 5c is a plan view of the convex portion 213 shown in FIG. 5b, FIG. 5d is a plan view of the convex portion 214 shown in FIG. 5b, and FIG. 5e is shown in FIG. 5b. FIG. 5F is a perspective view of the convex portion 213 viewed from the A direction in the drawing, and FIG. 5F is a perspective view of the convex portion 214 shown in FIG.
 本形態は図5a~図5fに示すように、図1a~図1gに示したものに対して、シート基材202にマトリックス状に設けられた周期配色領域211の大きさが、凸部213,214の頂部213b,214bよりも小さな点のみが異なるものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 5a to 5f, the size of the periodic color arrangement region 211 provided in a matrix on the sheet base material 202 is different from that shown in FIGS. 1a to 1g. Only the points smaller than the tops 213b and 214b of 214 are different.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート201においては、正面から見た場合は、白色の背景色領域212にマトリックス状に設けられた周期配色領域211が黒色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート201に対する視認方向を正面から例えば図5b中A方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部213,214のそれぞれの視認方向側、すなわち図5b中A側の側面213a,214aと頂部213b,214bのみが見えるようになっていく。すると、図5cに示すように、複数の凸部213においては、図5b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、周期配色領域211の面積が背景色領域212の面積よりも大きく、また、図5dに示すように、複数の凸部214においては、図5b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、背景色領域212のみを含むため、図5e及び図5fに示すように、凸部213と凸部214とでは、視認方向側の全体において周期配色領域211の色と背景色領域212の色とによって見える色が互いに異なることになる。具体的には、凸部213を図5b中A方向から視認した場合は、黒色からなる周期配色領域211の面積が白色からなる背景色領域212の面積よりも大きいことから濃い灰色に見え、凸部214を図5b中A方向から視認した場合は、中心線を介して視認方向側の領域が白色からなる背景色領域212のみを含み、頂部214bの一部が黒色からなる周期配色領域211であることから淡い灰色に見えることになる。それにより、偽造防止構造210の全体としては、図5b中A方向から視認した場合、複数の凸部214による淡い灰色の背景の中に、複数の凸部213による濃い灰色の潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 201 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the periodic color arrangement region 211 provided in a matrix on the white background color region 212 is recognized as black, and the latent image “T "Is not recognized. And if the visual recognition direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 201 is changed from the front to, for example, the A direction in FIG. 5b, the visual recognition direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 213 and 214, that is, the side surfaces 213a and 214a on the A side in FIG. Only the tops 213b and 214b become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 5c, in the plurality of convex portions 213, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 5b, The area of the periodic color arrangement region 211 is larger than the area of the background color region 212, and as shown in FIG. 5d, the plurality of convex portions 214 are perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 5b. Since the region on the viewing direction side when separated by a line includes only the background color region 212, as shown in FIGS. 5e and 5f, the convex portion 213 and the convex portion 214 are on the viewing direction side. As a whole, the visible colors are different depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 211 and the color of the background color region 212. Specifically, when the convex portion 213 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 5B, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 211 made of black is larger than the area of the background color region 212 made of white, and thus appears dark gray, When the portion 214 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 5b, the periodic coloration region 211 in which the region on the viewing direction side includes only the background color region 212 that is white through the center line, and a part of the top portion 214b is black. It will appear light gray for some reason. Thereby, as a whole of the anti-counterfeit structure 210, when viewed from the direction A in FIG. 5b, a dark gray latent image “T” formed by the plurality of protrusions 213 in a light gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 214. Appears to appear.
 (第4の実施の形態)
 図6aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第4の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図6bは、図6aに示した偽造防止構造310の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図6cは、図6bに示した凸部313の平面図であり、図6dは、図6bに示した凸部314の平面図であり、図6eは、図6bに示した凸部313の図中A方向から見た斜視図であり、図6fは、図6bに示した凸部314の図中A方向から見た斜視図である。
(Fourth embodiment)
FIG. 6a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is the fourth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 6b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 310 shown in FIG. 6a. 6c is a plan view of the convex portion 313 shown in FIG. 6b, FIG. 6d is a plan view of the convex portion 314 shown in FIG. 6b, and FIG. 6e is shown in FIG. 6b. FIG. 6F is a perspective view of the convex portion 313 viewed from the A direction in the drawing, and FIG. 6F is a perspective view of the convex portion 314 shown in FIG.
 本形態は図6a~図6fに示すように、図5a~図5fに示したものに対して、シート基材302の偽造防止構造310となる領域に黒色で背景色領域312が設けられ、この背景色領域312に白色の周期配色領域311がマトリックス状に設けられている点のみが異なるものである。すなわち、図5a~図5fに示したものに対して、背景色領域312の色と周期配色領域311の色とが反転しているものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6a to 6f, in contrast to what is shown in FIGS. 5a to 5f, a black background color region 312 is provided in the region of the sheet base material 302 where the anti-counterfeit structure 310 is provided. The only difference is that the white periodic color arrangement region 311 is provided in a matrix in the background color region 312. That is, the color of the background color region 312 and the color of the periodic color arrangement region 311 are inverted with respect to those shown in FIGS. 5a to 5f.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート301においては、正面から見た場合は、黒色の背景色領域312にマトリックス状に設けられた周期配色領域311が白色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート301に対する視認方向を正面から例えば図6b中A方向に変化させていくと、複数の凸部313,314のそれぞれの視認方向側、すなわち図6b中A側の側面313a,314aと頂部313b,314bのみが見えるようになっていく。すると、図6cに示すように、複数の凸部313においては、図6b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、周期配色領域311の面積が背景色領域312の面積よりも大きく、また、図6dに示すように、複数の凸部314においては、図6b中A方向から視認した場合の視認方向に直交する中心線にて分離された場合に視認方向側となる領域においては、背景色領域312のみを含むため、図6e及び図6fに示すように、凸部313と凸部314とでは、視認方向側の全体において周期配色領域311の色と背景色領域312の色とによって見える色が互いに異なることになる。具体的には、凸部313を図6b中A方向から視認した場合は、白色からなる周期配色領域311の面積が黒色からなる背景色領域312の面積よりも大きいことから淡い灰色に見え、凸部314を図6b中A方向から視認した場合は、中心線を介して視認方向側の領域が黒からなる背景色領域312のみを含み、頂部314bの一部が白色からなる周期配色領域311であることから濃い灰色に見えることになる。それにより、偽造防止構造310の全体としては、図6b中A方向から視認した場合、複数の凸部314による濃い灰色の背景の中に、複数の凸部313による淡い灰色の潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 301 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the periodic image area 311 provided in a matrix on the black background color area 312 is recognized only in white and the latent image “T "Is not recognized. And if the visual recognition direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 301 is changed from the front to, for example, the A direction in FIG. 6b, the respective visual recognition direction sides of the plurality of convex portions 313, 314, that is, the side surfaces 313a, 314a on the A side in FIG. Only the tops 313b and 314b become visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 6 c, in the plurality of convex portions 313, in the region on the viewing direction side when separated from the center line perpendicular to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 6 b, The area of the periodic coloration region 311 is larger than the area of the background color region 312 and, as shown in FIG. 6d, the plurality of convex portions 314 are centers orthogonal to the viewing direction when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 6b. Since the region on the viewing direction side when separated by a line includes only the background color region 312, as shown in FIGS. 6e and 6 f, the convex portion 313 and the convex portion 314 have a viewing direction side side. As a whole, the visible colors differ depending on the color of the periodic color arrangement region 311 and the color of the background color region 312. Specifically, when the convex portion 313 is viewed from the A direction in FIG. 6B, the area of the periodic color arrangement region 311 made of white is larger than the area of the background color region 312 made of black, and thus appears light gray and convex. When the portion 314 is viewed from the direction A in FIG. 6B, the region on the viewing direction side includes only the background color region 312 which is black via the center line, and the top portion 314b is a periodic coloration region 311 which is white. Something looks dark gray. Thereby, as a whole of the anti-counterfeit structure 310, when viewed from the A direction in FIG. 6b, a light gray latent image “T” formed by the plurality of protrusions 313 in a dark gray background formed by the plurality of protrusions 314. Appears to appear.
 なお、上述した実施の形態において、周期配色領域11,111,211,311を周方向に分割し、分割された複数の領域のそれぞれの色を互いに異なるものとすることも考えられる。その場合、偽造防止構造10,110,210,310を観察する方向によって視認される色が変化するため、それによっても真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In the above-described embodiment, it is also conceivable that the periodic color arrangement regions 11, 111, 211, 311 are divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided regions are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 10,110,210,310, it also becomes possible to perform authenticity determination by it.
 (第5の実施の形態)
 図7aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第5の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図7bは、図7aに示した偽造防止構造410の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図7cは、図7bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図7dは、図7bに示したB-B’断面図であり、図7eは、潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部413の構成を示す図であり、図7fは、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部414の構成を示す図である。
(Fifth embodiment)
FIG. 7a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a fifth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 7b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 410 shown in FIG. 7a. 7c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 7b, FIG. 7d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 7b, and FIG. 7e represents a latent image. FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group, and FIG. 7F is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group.
 本形態の偽造防止シート401は図7a~図7fに示すように、紙からなるシート基材402の一部の領域に偽造防止構造410が設けられて構成されている。シート基材402は、基材表面となる平面部403を有し、この平面部403の一部の領域に情報印刷領域404が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造410が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート401は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域404に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材402の情報印刷領域404に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材402に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造410による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 As shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f, the forgery prevention sheet 401 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 410 in a partial region of a sheet base material 402 made of paper. The sheet base material 402 has a flat surface portion 403 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 404 is provided in a part of the flat surface portion 403 and a forgery prevention structure 410 is provided in another region. . It can be considered that the forgery prevention sheet 401 configured in this way is used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 404. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402, it may be possible to print a background pattern on the sheet base material 402 as a pre-print or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the latent image from the forgery prevention structure 410 from being difficult to see.
 図7bに示すように、シート基材402に設けられた偽造防止構造410には、シート基材402の平面部403のベース色と同一の白色からなる第1の配色部である背景色領域412上に、背景色領域412とは異なる黒色からなる複数の第2の配色部であるマーク部411がマトリックス状に設けられて表示部が構成されている。複数のマーク部411がマトリックス状に設けられた領域には、第1の凸部群を構成するエンボス部である複数の凸部413と、第2の凸部群を構成するエンボス部である複数の凸部414とが形成されている。これら凸部413,414は図7c~図7fに示すように、円錐から頂点の部分が取り除かれた形状であって、シート基材402の表面から平面部403の法線方向に0.05~0.1mm程度突出し、平面部403との境界部分が直径0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。この境界部分から離れていくに従ってその断面積が徐々に狭くなり、境界部分の反対側は平面部403と平行な頂部413b,414bとなっている。第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部413は、第1の凸部群の形状によって潜像となる「T」の字を表現するように複数のマーク部411の配列方向と並行して行や列を構成して背景色領域412の所定領域に形成されており、そのそれぞれは、マトリックス状に設けられた複数のマーク部411間に形成されている。それにより、図7eに示すように、4つのマーク部411の一部がそれぞれ側面413aにかかるとともに、その4つのマーク部411に囲まれた部分の背景色領域412の白色が頂部413bにて表出している。また、第2の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部414は、背景色領域412にて第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部413が形成された領域を取り囲むように、複数の凸部413の配列方向と並行して行や列を構成して形成されており、そのそれぞれは、マトリックス状に設けられた複数のマーク部411のうち、所定領域以外の領域に設けられたマーク部411上に形成されている。それにより、図7fに示すように、頂部414b及び側面414aがマーク部411を含むようなものとなっている。なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造410は、説明を簡単にするために100個のマーク部411が10×10のマトリックス状に形成されたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造410によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 As shown in FIG. 7b, the anti-counterfeit structure 410 provided on the sheet base material 402 has a background color region 412 which is a first color arrangement portion having the same white color as the base color of the flat surface portion 403 of the sheet base material 402. On the top, a plurality of mark portions 411 which are a second color arrangement portion made of black different from the background color region 412 are provided in a matrix form to constitute a display portion. In the region where the plurality of mark portions 411 are provided in a matrix, a plurality of convex portions 413 which are embossed portions constituting the first convex portion group and a plurality of embossed portions constituting the second convex portion group. The convex portion 414 is formed. As shown in FIGS. 7c to 7f, these convex portions 413 and 414 have a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, and are 0.05 to 0.05 from the surface of the sheet base material 402 in the normal direction of the flat surface portion 403. It protrudes about 0.1 mm, and the boundary part with the flat part 403 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. On the opposite side of the boundary portion, apexes 413b and 414b parallel to the flat surface portion 403 are formed. The plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group are parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of mark portions 411 so as to express the letter “T” that becomes a latent image by the shape of the first convex portion group. A row and a column are formed and formed in a predetermined region of the background color region 412, each of which is formed between a plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7e, a part of each of the four mark portions 411 is applied to the side surface 413a, and the white of the background color region 412 surrounded by the four mark portions 411 is represented by the top portion 413b. I'm out. In addition, the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group surround the region where the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group are formed in the background color region 412. It is formed by forming rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the convex portions 413, each of which is a mark provided in a region other than the predetermined region among the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix shape. It is formed on the part 411. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7 f, the top portion 414 b and the side surface 414 a include the mark portion 411. Note that the anti-counterfeit structure 410 illustrated in this embodiment has 100 mark portions 411 formed in a 10 × 10 matrix shape for the sake of simplicity of explanation, but the number thereof should be increased. As a result, the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the forgery prevention structure 410 can be made finer, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート401の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 configured as described above will be described.
 まず、シート基材402の偽造防止構造410が設けられる領域、すなわち、白色の背景色領域412となる領域に、100個のマーク部411を10×10のマトリックス状に黒色で印刷する。なお、このマーク部411の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, 100 mark portions 411 are printed in black in a 10 × 10 matrix shape in a region where the anti-counterfeit structure 410 of the sheet base material 402 is provided, that is, a region which becomes a white background color region 412. The mark portion 411 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
 次に、マーク部411が印刷された領域に、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部413と、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部414とをエンボス版を用いて形成する。凸部413は、マーク部411が印刷された領域のうち、潜像となる「T」を形成する所定領域にてマトリックス状に設けられた複数のマーク部411間に形成し、また、凸部414は、マトリックス状に設けられた複数のマーク部411のうち、所定領域以外の領域に設けられたマーク部411上に形成する。 Next, a convex portion 413 constituting the first convex portion group and a convex portion 414 constituting the second convex portion group are formed in the region where the mark portion 411 is printed using an embossed plate. The convex portion 413 is formed between a plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix in a predetermined region that forms “T” as a latent image in the region where the mark portion 411 is printed. 414 is formed on the mark portion 411 provided in a region other than the predetermined region among the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート401が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材402の情報印刷領域404に印刷されて使用されることになる。 The anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402 and used.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート401の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the above-described anti-counterfeit sheet 401 will be described.
 まず、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401を正面、すなわち、シート基材402の平面部403の法線方向から観察した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 403 of the sheet base material 402 will be described.
 図8は、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401を正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための図であり、偽造防止構造410の見え方を示す。 FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front, and shows how the anti-counterfeit structure 410 is seen.
 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401を、正面、すなわち平面部403の法線方向から観察した場合、図8に示すように、偽造防止構造410においては、背景色領域412が白色であるのに対してこの背景色領域412にマトリックス状に設けられた複数のマーク部411が黒色であることから、マトリックス状の複数のマーク部411が認識される。この際、シート基材402には、平面部403から突出した複数の凸部413,414が形成されているが、偽造防止シート401を正面から観察した場合は、この凸部413,414の突出方向から観察することになるため、マーク部411は観察方向から遮るものが存在せずにマトリックス状に設けられた全てのマーク部411が視認され、また、凸部413,414が認識されにくく、潜像「T」は浮かび上がって見えてこない。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 403, the anti-counterfeit structure 410 has a white background color region 412 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, since the plurality of mark portions 411 provided in a matrix in the background color region 412 are black, the plurality of mark portions 411 in the matrix shape are recognized. At this time, a plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 protruding from the flat surface portion 403 are formed on the sheet base material 402. When the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is observed from the front, the protruding portions 413 and 414 protrude. Since the mark portion 411 is observed from the direction, all the mark portions 411 provided in a matrix shape are visually recognized without any obstruction from the observation direction, and the convex portions 413 and 414 are not easily recognized, The latent image “T” emerges and does not appear.
 次に、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材402の平面部403の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, the operation when the observation direction for the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 403 of the sheet base material 402 will be described.
 図9aは、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に第1の凸部群を構成する凸部413について側面方向から見た図であり、図9bは、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に第2の凸部群を構成する凸部14について側面方向から見た図であり、図9c~図9fは、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401における偽造防止構造410の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 9A is a view of the convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front. 9b is a view of the convex portions 14 constituting the second convex portion group viewed from the side when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front. FIG. 9c to FIG. 9f are views showing how the anti-counterfeit structure 410 appears in the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
 図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、シート基材402の平面部403に対する観察方向のなす角度が鋭角になっていく。すると、図9a及び図9bに示すように、平面部403から突出した複数の凸部413,414の側面413a,414aが、その凸部413,414の観察方向側に隣接する凸部413,414によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部413b,414bのみが見えるような状態となる。 When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f is changed from the front, the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 403 of the sheet base material 402 becomes an acute angle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9a and 9b, the side surfaces 413a and 414a of the plurality of protrusions 413 and 414 protruding from the flat surface 403 are adjacent to the protrusions 413 and 414 on the observation direction side. It becomes hidden and disappears, and only the top portions 413b and 414b are visible.
 ここで、複数の凸部413,414のうち、潜像を表現する第1の凸部群を構成する凸部413においては、図7eに示したように、背景色領域412の白色が頂部413bにて表出しており、また、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部414においては、図7fに示したように、背景色領域412とは異なる黒色のマーク部411が頂部414bにて表出している。 Here, among the plurality of convex portions 413 and 414, in the convex portion 413 constituting the first convex portion group expressing the latent image, as shown in FIG. 7e, the white color of the background color region 412 is the top portion 413b. Moreover, in the convex part 414 which comprises the 2nd convex part group, as shown in FIG. 7f, the black mark part 411 different from the background color area | region 412 is represented by the top part 414b. I'm out.
 そのため、偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を、例えば図7a中下側に変化させていき、複数の凸部413,414の側面413a,414aが、その凸部413,414の観察方向側に隣接する凸部413,414によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部413b,414bのみが見えるような状態となると、凸部413の頂部413bと、凸部414の頂部414bとの色に違いによって、図9cに示すように、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が白色で浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Therefore, the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to, for example, the lower side in FIG. 7a, and the side surfaces 413a and 414a of the plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 413 and 414. When the convex portions 413 and 414 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 413b and 414b are visible, depending on the color of the top portion 413b of the convex portion 413 and the top portion 414b of the convex portion 414, FIG. As shown in the figure, the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 appears to appear white.
 ここで、図7a~図7fに示した偽造防止シート401においては、背景色領域412に複数のマーク部411がマトリックス状に設けられ、この背景色領域412の所定領域にて複数のマーク部411の配列方向と並行して行や列を構成することにより潜像「T」を形成する複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群が形成されるとともに、背景色領域412における所定領域を取り囲む領域にて第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部413の配列方向と並行して行や列を構成することにより潜像「T」を取り囲む複数の凸部414からなる第2の凸部群が形成されている。そのため、第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部413と第2の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部414とが行や列を含む略マトリックス状となっており、平面部403に対して鋭角をなすどの方向から観察した場合であっても、複数の凸部413,414の側面413a,414aが、その凸部413,414の観察方向側に隣接する凸部413,414によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部413b,414bのみが見えるような状態となり、第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部413の頂部413bの色と第2の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部414の頂部414bの色との違いによって第1の凸部群による潜像「T」が白色で浮かび上がって見えるようになる。例えば、偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を図7a中上側に変化させていくと、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が図9dに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を図7a中右側に変化させていくと、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が図9eに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向を図7a中左側に変化させていくと、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が図9fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Here, in the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f, a plurality of mark portions 411 are provided in a matrix in the background color region 412, and a plurality of mark portions 411 are provided in a predetermined region of the background color region 412. By forming rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex parts 413 that form the latent image “T”, a predetermined area in the background color area 412 is formed. In a surrounding area, a second projection is formed of a plurality of projections 414 surrounding the latent image “T” by forming rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of projections 413 constituting the first projection group. A convex group is formed. Therefore, the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group and the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group are in a substantially matrix shape including rows and columns. Even when observed from any direction that forms an acute angle, the side surfaces 413a and 414a of the plurality of convex portions 413 and 414 are hidden by the convex portions 413 and 414 adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 413 and 414. In this state, only the top portions 413b and 414b are visible, and the colors of the top portions 413b of the plurality of convex portions 413 constituting the first convex portion group and the plurality of convex portions constituting the second convex portion group. Due to the difference from the color of the top portion 414b of the portion 414, the latent image “T” by the first convex portion group appears to appear white. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 7A, a latent image “T” configured by the shape of the first convex portion group including a plurality of convex portions 413 is illustrated in FIG. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to the right side in FIG. 7a, the first convex portion group formed by a plurality of convex portions 413 is formed. The latent image “T” appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 9e, and when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 401 is changed to the left side in FIG. 7a, the first composed of a plurality of convex portions 413 is formed. As shown in FIG. 9f, the latent image “T” formed by the shape of the convex portion group appears to appear.
 なお、上述したどの方向から観察した場合においても、第2の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部414のうち観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部414においては、その側面414aが視認可能な状態となるが、凸部413,414の数が多かったり、凸部413によって構成される潜像の線幅が、観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部414の側面414aに表出したマーク部411による線幅よりも太かったりすること等によってこのマーク部411が潜像とは無関係であることが認識できればよい。もし、観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部414の側面414aに表出したマーク部411によって潜像が不明瞭となるような場合は、潜像を構成する凸部413を、マトリックス状に形成された複数のマーク部411のうち、周囲から離れたマーク部411間に設ける等すればよい。 Note that, when viewed from any of the above-described directions, the side surface 414a of the plurality of convex portions 414 constituting the second convex portion group can be visually recognized at the convex portion 414 constituting the row closest to the observation direction. However, the number of the convex portions 413 and 414 is large, or the line width of the latent image formed by the convex portions 413 appears on the side surface 414a of the convex portion 414 constituting the row in the foremost direction in the observation direction. It is only necessary to recognize that the mark portion 411 is unrelated to the latent image by being thicker than the line width of the mark portion 411 or the like. If the latent image is obscured by the mark portion 411 appearing on the side surface 414a of the convex portion 414 that forms the foremost row in the observation direction, the convex portion 413 that forms the latent image is arranged in a matrix. Among the plurality of formed mark portions 411, it may be provided between the mark portions 411 separated from the periphery.
 上述した偽造防止シート401は、複写した場合、シート基材402の情報印刷領域404に印刷された情報や、シート基材402に印刷によりマトリックス状に設けられたマーク部411は複写されるものの、凸部413,414までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の観察方向を変えていった場合であっても、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート401においては、偽造防止シート401に対する観察方向をシート基材402の平面部403の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、複数の凸部413からなる第1の凸部群による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 When the forgery prevention sheet 401 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 404 of the sheet base material 402 and the mark portions 411 provided in a matrix by printing on the sheet base material 402 are copied. The projections 413 and 414 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image formed by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 does not appear, and thus it is possible to perform authenticity determination. Become. When performing the authenticity determination in this way, in the forgery prevention sheet 401 of the present embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 401 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 403 of the sheet base material 402 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is true or false without being limited to the observation direction.
 (第6の実施の形態)
 図10aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第6の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図10bは、図10aに示した偽造防止構造510の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図10cは、図10bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図10dは、図10bに示したB-B’断面図であり、図10eは、潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部513の構成を示す図であり、図10fは、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部514の構成を示す図である。
(Sixth embodiment)
FIG. 10a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet that is a sixth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 10b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 510 shown in FIG. 10a. 10c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 10b, FIG. 10d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 10b, and FIG. 10e represents a latent image. FIG. 10F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 514 constituting the second convex portion group. FIG. 10F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 513 constituting the first convex portion group.
 本形態は図10a~10fに示すように、図7a~図7fに示したものに対して、シート基材502の偽造防止構造510となる領域に黒色で背景色領域512が設けられ、この背景色領域512に白色のマーク部511がマトリックス状に設けられている点のみが異なるものである。すなわち、図7a~図7fに示したものに対して、背景色領域512の色とマーク部511の色とが反転しているものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10a to 10f, a background color region 512 in black is provided in the region which becomes the forgery prevention structure 510 of the sheet base material 502 in contrast to the one shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. The only difference is that white mark portions 511 are provided in a matrix in the color region 512. That is, the color of the background color region 512 and the color of the mark portion 511 are inverted with respect to those shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート501においては、正面から見た場合は、黒色の背景色領域512にマトリックス状に設けられたマーク部511が白色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート501に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、平面部503から突出した複数の凸部513,514の側面513a,514aが、その凸部513,514の観察方向側に隣接する凸部513,514によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部513b,514bのみが見えるような状態となり、凸部513の頂部513bと凸部514の頂部514bとの色に違いによって、複数の凸部513からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が黒色で浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 501 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 511 provided in a matrix in the black background color region 512 in white. Is not recognized. And if the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 501 is changed from the front, the side surfaces 513a and 514a of the plurality of convex portions 513 and 514 protruding from the flat portion 503 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 513 and 514. The convex portions 513 and 514 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 513b and 514b are visible. Depending on the color of the top portion 513b of the convex portion 513 and the top portion 514b of the convex portion 514, a plurality of convex portions are formed. The latent image “T” constituted by the shape of the first convex portion group consisting of 513 appears to appear in black.
 (第7の実施の形態)
 図11aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第7の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図11bは、図11aに示した偽造防止構造610の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図11cは、図11bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図11dは、図11bに示したB-B’断面図であり、図11eは、潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部613の構成を示す図であり、図11fは、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部614の構成を示す図である。
(Seventh embodiment)
FIG. 11a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a seventh embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 11b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 610 shown in FIG. 11a. 11c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 11b, FIG. 11d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 11b, and FIG. 11e represents a latent image. FIG. 11F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 613 constituting the second convex portion group, and FIG. 11F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 613 constituting the first convex portion group.
 本形態は図11a~図11fに示すように、図7a~図7fに示したものに対して、シート基材602にマトリックス状に設けられたマーク部611の大きさが、凸部614の頂部614bよりも小さい点のみが異なるものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11a to 11f, the size of the mark portions 611 provided in a matrix on the sheet base material 602 is larger than that shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f. Only the points smaller than 614b are different.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート601においては、正面から見た場合は、白色の背景色領域612にマトリックス状に設けられたマーク部611が黒色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート601に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、平面部603から突出した複数の凸部613,614の側面613a,614aが、その凸部613,614の観察方向側に隣接する凸部613,614によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部613b,614bのみが見えるような状態となり、凸部613の頂部613bと凸部614の頂部614bとの色に違いによって、複数の凸部613からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が白色で浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 601 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 611 provided in a matrix in the white background color region 612 in black. Is not recognized. And if the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 601 is changed from the front, the side surfaces 613a and 614a of the plurality of convex portions 613 and 614 protruding from the flat surface portion 603 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 613 and 614. The convex portions 613 and 614 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 613b and 614b are visible. Depending on the color of the top portion 613b of the convex portion 613 and the top portion 614b of the convex portion 614, a plurality of convex portions are formed. The latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group consisting of 613 appears to appear to be white.
 (第8の実施の形態)
 図12aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第8の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図12bは、図12aに示した偽造防止構造710の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図12cは、図12bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図12dは、図12bに示したB-B’断面図であり、図12eは、潜像を表現するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部713の構成を示す図であり、図12fは、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部714の構成を示す図である。
(Eighth embodiment)
FIG. 12a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as the eighth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 12b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 710 shown in FIG. 12a. 12c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 12b, FIG. 12d is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB ′ shown in FIG. 12b, and FIG. 12e represents a latent image. FIG. 12F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 713 constituting the first convex portion group, and FIG. 12F is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portions 714 constituting the second convex portion group.
 本形態は図12a~図12fに示すように、図11a~図11fに示したものに対して、シート基材702の偽造防止構造710となる領域に黒色で背景色領域712が設けられ、この背景色領域712に白色のマーク部711がマトリックス状に設けられている点のみが異なるものである。すなわち、図11a~図11fに示したものに対して、背景色領域712の色とマーク部711の色とが反転しているものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12a to 12f, a background color region 712 in black is provided in the region which becomes the forgery prevention structure 710 of the sheet base material 702 with respect to the one shown in FIGS. 11a to 11f. The only difference is that white mark portions 711 are provided in a matrix in the background color region 712. That is, the color of the background color region 712 and the color of the mark portion 711 are reversed with respect to those shown in FIGS. 11a to 11f.
 上記のように構成された偽造防止シート701においては、正面から見た場合は、黒色の背景色領域712にマトリックス状に設けられたマーク部711が白色で認識されるだけで潜像「T」は認識されない。そして、偽造防止シート701に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、平面部703から突出した複数の凸部713,714の側面713a,714aが、その凸部713,714の観察方向側に隣接する凸部713,714によって隠れて見えなくなっていき、頂部713b,714bのみが見えるような状態となり、凸部713の頂部713bと凸部714の頂部714bとの色に違いによって、複数の凸部713からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって構成される潜像「T」が黒色で浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 In the anti-counterfeit sheet 701 configured as described above, when viewed from the front, the latent image “T” is obtained only by recognizing the mark portions 711 provided in a matrix in the black background color region 712 in white. Is not recognized. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 701 is changed from the front, the side surfaces 713a and 714a of the plurality of convex portions 713 and 714 protruding from the plane portion 703 are adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portions 713 and 714. The convex portions 713 and 714 are hidden and cannot be seen, and only the top portions 713b and 714b are visible. Depending on the color of the top portion 713b of the convex portion 713 and the top portion 714b of the convex portion 714, a plurality of convex portions The latent image “T” formed by the shape of the first convex portion group 713 is black and appears to appear.
 なお、上述した第5~第8の実施の形態における凸部においては、円柱形のものや頂部がない円錐形のものやドーム型のものとすることも考えられる。ただし、上述したように平面部と平行となる頂部を有する形状の方が、背景色領域による色が連なる状態となって潜像を明確に浮かび上がらせることができる。また、断面が矩形状となるものとすることも考えられる。ただし、図7a~図7f及び図10a~図10fに示したものにおいては、凸部413,414,513,514のうち、少なくとも潜像を表現する第1の凸部群を構成する凸部413,513を、平面部403,503との境界部分が円形状のように中心からの距離が略一定となるものとした方が、どの方向から観察しても視認可能となる頂部413b,513bの形状が同一となり、凸部413,513によって浮かび上がる潜像の精細な形状を均一化することができる。また、平面部に対する形成角度においては、凸部の側面を観察方向側に隣接する凸部によって隠れやすくするために、平面部の法線方向に平行に突出するように形成し、凸部のそれぞれを円柱等の柱状に形成することが好ましい。 It should be noted that the convex portions in the fifth to eighth embodiments described above may be of a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without a top portion, or a dome shape. However, as described above, the shape having the apex that is parallel to the plane portion can make the latent image clearly appear in a state in which the colors of the background color region are continuous. It is also conceivable that the cross section is rectangular. However, in the ones shown in FIGS. 7a to 7f and FIGS. 10a to 10f, among the convex portions 413, 414, 513, and 514, the convex portions 413 constituting at least a first convex portion group expressing a latent image. , 513 of the top portions 413b, 513b that can be viewed from any direction when the distance from the center is substantially constant such that the boundary between the flat portions 403, 503 is circular. The shape is the same, and the fine shape of the latent image floating by the convex portions 413 and 513 can be made uniform. In addition, in the formation angle with respect to the flat portion, in order to easily hide the side surface of the convex portion by the convex portion adjacent to the observation direction side, the convex portion is formed so as to protrude in parallel to the normal direction of the flat portion. Is preferably formed in a columnar shape such as a cylinder.
 また、上述した第5~第8の実施の形態においては、複数の凸部413,513,613,713からなる第1の凸部群の形状によって潜像「T」を表現しているが、複数の凸部414,514,614,714からなる第2の凸部群の形状によって潜像「T」を表現してもよい。その場合は、偽造防止シート401,501,601,701に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、複数の凸部414,514,614,714の頂部414b,514b,614b,714bに表出している色、すなわち、マーク部411,511,611,711の色で潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Further, in the fifth to eighth embodiments described above, the latent image “T” is expressed by the shape of the first convex portion group including the plurality of convex portions 413, 513, 613, and 713. The latent image “T” may be expressed by the shape of the second convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions 414, 514, 614, 714. In that case, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheets 401, 501, 601, and 701 is changed from the front, it appears on the top portions 414b, 514b, 614b, and 714b of the plurality of convex portions 414, 514, 614, and 714. The latent image “T” appears to appear in the colors that are present, that is, the colors of the mark portions 411, 511, 611, 711.
 また、上述した第5~第8の実施の形態において、マーク部411,511,611,711を周方向に分割し、分割された複数の領域のそれぞれの色を互いに異なるものとすることも考えられる。その場合、偽造防止構造410,510,610,710を観察する方向によって視認される色が変化するため、それによっても真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In the fifth to eighth embodiments described above, it is also possible to divide the mark portions 411, 511, 611, and 711 in the circumferential direction and make the respective colors of the divided regions different from each other. It is done. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes according to the direction in which the forgery prevention structures 410, 510, 610, and 710 are observed, it is possible to determine whether it is true or false.
 また、上述した8つの実施の形態において、エンボス部として凸部ではなく、平面部から窪んだ凹部を設けてこの凹部をエンボス部として用いてもよい。すなわち、本発明のエンボス部としては、平面部に形成された凸部や凹部のいずれかを用いることができる。 Further, in the above-described eight embodiments, instead of the convex portion as the embossed portion, a concave portion recessed from the flat surface portion may be provided, and this concave portion may be used as the embossed portion. That is, as the embossed part of the present invention, either a convex part or a concave part formed on the flat part can be used.
 (第9の実施の形態)
 図13aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第9の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図13bは、図13aに示した偽造防止構造810の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図13cは、図13bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図13dは、図13bに示した内マーク813が設けられた凸部811の構成を示す図であり、図13eは、図13bに示した内マーク813が設けられていない凸部811の構成を示す図である。
(Ninth embodiment)
FIG. 13a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as a ninth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 13b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 810 shown in FIG. 13a. 13c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 13b, and FIG. 13d is a view showing the configuration of the convex portion 811 provided with the inner mark 813 shown in FIG. 13b. FIG. 13e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 811 that is not provided with the inner mark 813 shown in FIG. 13b.
 本形態の偽造防止シート801は図13a~図13eに示すように、紙からなるシート基材802の一部の領域に偽造防止構造810が設けられて構成されている。シート基材802は、平面部803を有し、この平面部803の一部の領域に情報印刷領域804が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造810が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート801は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域804に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材802の情報印刷領域804に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材802に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造810による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 As shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e, the forgery prevention sheet 801 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 810 in a partial region of a sheet base material 802 made of paper. The sheet base material 802 has a flat portion 803, an information printing region 804 is provided in a partial region of the flat portion 803, and a forgery prevention structure 810 is provided in another region. The counterfeit prevention sheet 801 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In that case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information print area 804. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802, it may be possible to print a tint block as a pre-print on the sheet base material 802 or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 810.
 シート基材802に設けられた偽造防止構造810は図13bに示すように、シート基材802にマトリックス状に形成されたエンボス部である複数の凸部811と、この複数の凸部811の周囲にそれぞれ設けられた第1のマーク部である複数の外周マーク812と、複数の凸部811のうち予め決められた凸部811のみに設けられた第2のマーク部である内マーク813とから構成されている。凸部811は図13cに示すように、円錐から頂点の部分が取り除かれた形状であって、シート基材802の平面部803の法線方向に0.1mm程度突出し、平面部803との境界部分が直径0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。この境界部分から離れていくに従ってその断面積が徐々に狭くなり、図13d及び図13eに示すように、境界部分の反対側は平面部803と平行な頂部811bとなっている。そのため、凸部811の側面811aは、平面部803の法線に対して斜めの方向を向いている。外周マーク812は、凸部811をそれぞれ取り囲むようにシート基材802の平面部803に印刷によって設けられており、凸部811の平面部803との境界部分が円形状であることから、円形状となっている。内マーク813は、複数の凸部811のうち予め決められた凸部811の側面811aの全周に渡って印刷によって設けられており、凸部811の平面部803との境界部分が円形状であり、また、この境界部分から離れていくに従って凸部811の断面積が徐々に狭くなることから、シート基材802の平面部803の法線方向から見た場合に円形状となっている。なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造810は、説明を簡単にするために縦横がそれぞれ10個ずつの凸部811及び外周マーク812を用いたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造810によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 As shown in FIG. 13B, the anti-counterfeit structure 810 provided on the sheet base material 802 includes a plurality of convex portions 811 that are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base material 802, and the periphery of the plurality of convex portions 811. A plurality of outer peripheral marks 812 that are first mark portions respectively provided on the inner surface 813 and an inner mark 813 that is a second mark portion provided only on a predetermined convex portion 811 among the plurality of convex portions 811. It is configured. As shown in FIG. 13 c, the convex portion 811 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, protrudes about 0.1 mm in the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and has a boundary with the flat portion 803. The portion has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. As shown in FIGS. 13d and 13e, the opposite side of the boundary portion is a top portion 811b parallel to the plane portion 803. Therefore, the side surface 811 a of the convex portion 811 is directed in an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 803. The outer peripheral mark 812 is provided by printing on the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 so as to surround the convex portion 811, and the boundary portion between the convex portion 811 and the flat surface portion 803 is circular. It has become. The inner mark 813 is provided by printing over the entire circumference of the side surface 811a of the predetermined convex portion 811 among the plurality of convex portions 811, and the boundary portion between the convex portion 811 and the flat surface portion 803 is circular. In addition, since the cross-sectional area of the convex portion 811 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the circular shape is obtained when viewed from the normal direction of the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802. Note that the anti-counterfeit structure 810 illustrated in this embodiment uses ten convex portions 811 and outer peripheral marks 812, each of which is 10 in length and width for the sake of simplicity of explanation. As shown, the forgery prevention structure 810 makes it possible to make a character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted fine, and to easily express a curve or the like.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート801の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet 801 configured as described above will be described.
 図14a及び図14bは、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801の製造方法を説明するための図であり、シート基材802のうち偽造防止構造810が設けられる領域のみを示す。 FIGS. 14a and 14b are views for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e, and show only a region of the sheet base material 802 where the forgery prevention structure 810 is provided.
 まず、図14aに示すように、シート基材802の偽造防止構造810が設けられる領域に、外周マーク812及び内マーク813をそれぞれ円形状に印刷する。外周マーク812は10×10のマトリックス状に、また、内マーク813は、この100個の外周マーク812のうち「T」を形成する位置となる外周マーク812内に外周マーク812に沿うように印刷する。これら外周マーク812と内マーク813との組み合わせは、偽造防止構造810によって浮かび上がる潜像(本形態においては「T」)に応じて予め設定されており、印刷データとして与えられる。また、これら外周マーク812と内マーク813の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, as shown in FIG. 14a, the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are each printed in a circular shape in the region of the sheet base material 802 where the forgery prevention structure 810 is provided. The outer circumference mark 812 is printed in a 10 × 10 matrix, and the inner mark 813 is printed so as to be along the outer circumference mark 812 in the outer circumference mark 812 that is a position where “T” is formed among the 100 outer circumference marks 812. To do. The combination of the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 810, and is given as print data. Further, the printing of the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
 次に、図14bに示すように、外周マーク812及び内マーク813が印刷された領域に、エンボス版を用いて複数の凸部811を形成する。凸部811は、100個の外周マーク812の内側に、かつ内マーク813が設けられた部分については内マーク813の外側が平面部803との境界部分となるようにそれぞれ形成され、それにより、外周マーク812が凸部811を取り囲み、また、内マーク813が凸部811の側面の全周に渡って設けられた形状となる。 Next, as shown in FIG. 14b, a plurality of convex portions 811 are formed using an embossed plate in the area where the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are printed. The convex portion 811 is formed inside the 100 outer peripheral marks 812 and the portion provided with the inner mark 813 so that the outer side of the inner mark 813 is a boundary portion with the plane portion 803, thereby The outer peripheral mark 812 surrounds the convex portion 811, and the inner mark 813 has a shape provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion 811.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート801が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材802の情報印刷領域804に印刷されて使用されることになる。 As described above, the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is manufactured, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802 and used.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート801の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the above-described forgery prevention sheet 801 will be described.
 まず、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801を正面、すなわち、シート基材802の平面部803の法線方向から観察した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 will be described.
 図15aは、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造810における光の反射を示す図であり、図15bは、図15aに示した光の反射による外周マーク812及び内マーク813の見え方を示す図であり、図15cは、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造810における外周マーク812及び内マーク813の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 15a is a diagram showing light reflection in the forgery prevention structure 810 when the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front, and FIG. 15b is due to the light reflection shown in FIG. 15a. FIG. 15C is a view showing how the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are seen, and FIG. 15C is an outer periphery mark 812 and an inner mark in the forgery prevention structure 810 when the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13A to 13E is observed from the front. It is a figure which shows how 813 looks.
 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合、シート基材802のうち平面部803が観察方向と対向するため、平面部803となる領域においては観察方向からの光が観察方向にそのまま反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が多くなる。偽造防止構造810に設けられた外周マーク812と内マーク813のうち、外周マーク812は、シート基材802の平面部803となる領域に設けられているため、図15aの一点鎖線で示すように観察方向からの光が外周マーク812上で観察方向に反射し、それにより、図15bに示すように外周マーク812が明確に見えるようになる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is observed from the front, the plane portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 is opposed to the observation direction. The amount of light received in the observation direction increases as it is reflected directly in the observation direction. Of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810, the outer periphery mark 812 is provided in a region that becomes the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and therefore, as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Light from the viewing direction is reflected in the viewing direction on the outer circumference mark 812, thereby making the outer circumference mark 812 clearly visible as shown in FIG. 15b.
 一方、シート基材802に形成された凸部811の側面811aにおいては、偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合、観察方向に対向しない状態となっているため、観察方向からの光は観察方向以外の方向にも反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が少なくなる。偽造防止構造810に設けられた外周マーク812と内マーク813のうち、内マーク813は、凸部811の側面811aに設けられているため、図15aの破線で示すように観察方向からの光が内マーク813上で観察方向以外にも反射して分散し、それにより、図15bに示すように内マーク813は薄くしか見えない状態となる。 On the other hand, in the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is observed from the front, it is in a state not facing the observation direction. The amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light is reduced by reflecting in other directions. Of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810, the inner mark 813 is provided on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811. Therefore, as shown by the broken line in FIG. The inner mark 813 is reflected and dispersed in the direction other than the observation direction, so that the inner mark 813 can be seen only thinly as shown in FIG. 15b.
 そのため、偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合は、図15cに示すように、複数の凸部811のうち内マーク813が設けられていない凸部811においてはその周囲に設けられた外周マーク812のみが視認され、複数の凸部811のうち側面811aに内マーク813が設けられた凸部811においても、内マーク813が薄くしか見えないのに対して外周マーク812が明確に見えることによる錯覚によってほとんど外周マーク812しか視認されない状態となる。 Therefore, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is observed from the front, as shown in FIG. 15C, the outer peripheral mark 812 provided around the convex portion 811 where the inner mark 813 is not provided among the plurality of convex portions 811. Only in the convex portion 811 in which the inner mark 813 is provided only on the side surface 811a of the plurality of convex portions 811, the inner mark 813 is only seen thin, but the illusion that the outer peripheral mark 812 is clearly visible As a result, almost only the outer peripheral mark 812 is visible.
 次に、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材802の平面部803の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, the operation when the observation direction for the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 will be described.
 図16aは、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造810における光の反射を示す図であり、図16bは、図16aに示した光の反射による外周マーク812及び内マーク813の見え方を示す図であり、図16c~図16fは、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造810における外周マーク812及び内マーク813の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 16a is a diagram showing light reflection in the anti-counterfeit structure 810 when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front, and FIG. FIGS. 16c to 16f are views showing how the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 are seen by the reflection of the light shown, and FIGS. 16c to 16f change the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e from the front. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 in the forgery prevention structure 810 at the time of becoming.
 図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、その観察方向が、シート基材802に形成された凸部811の側面811aに対向する方向に近づいていく。すると、凸部811の側面811aにおいては、観察方向からの光が観察方向にそのまま反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が多くなる。偽造防止構造810に設けられた外周マーク812と内マーク813のうち、内マーク813は、シート基材802に形成された凸部811の側面811aに設けられているため、図16aの一点鎖線で示すように観察方向からの光が内マーク813上で観察方向に反射し、それにより、図16bに示すように内マーク813が明確に見えるようになる。 When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e is changed from the front, the observation direction approaches a direction facing the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802. Go. Then, on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811, light from the observation direction is reflected as it is in the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light increases. Of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided on the forgery prevention structure 810, the inner mark 813 is provided on the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802, and therefore, the one-dot chain line in FIG. As shown, light from the viewing direction is reflected in the viewing direction on the inner mark 813 so that the inner mark 813 can be clearly seen as shown in FIG. 16b.
 一方、シート基材802の平面部803は観察方向に対向しなくなるため、観察方向からの光は観察方向以外の方向にも反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が少なくなる。偽造防止構造810に設けられた外周マーク812と内マーク813のうち、外周マーク812は、シート基材802の平面部803に設けられているため、図16aの破線で示すように観察方向からの光が外周マーク812上で観察方向以外にも反射して分散し、それにより、図16bに示すように外周マーク812は薄くしか見えない状態となる。 On the other hand, since the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 does not face the observation direction, light from the observation direction is reflected in directions other than the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction is reduced. Of the outer periphery mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided on the forgery prevention structure 810, the outer periphery mark 812 is provided on the flat surface portion 803 of the sheet base material 802, and therefore, as shown by the broken line in FIG. The light is reflected and dispersed on the outer peripheral mark 812 in the direction other than the observation direction, so that the outer peripheral mark 812 can be seen only thinly as shown in FIG. 16b.
 そのため、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を、例えば図13a中下側に変化させていくと図16cに示すように、偽造防止構造810に設けられた内マーク813によって構成される潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。なお、この際、凸部811を近接して形成したり、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向をシート基材802の法線方向から大きく変化させたりした場合、平面部803に設けられた外周マーク812が、その外周マーク812によって取り囲まれた凸部811の観察方向側に隣接する凸部811によって隠れて見えなくなり、内マーク813による潜像が視認しやすくなる。 Therefore, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 801 is changed to the lower side in FIG. 13A, for example, as shown in FIG. 16C, the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810 is obtained. Appears to appear. At this time, when the convex portion 811 is formed in the vicinity, or when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 801 is greatly changed from the normal direction of the sheet base material 802, the outer peripheral mark 812 provided on the flat portion 803. However, the convex portion 811 surrounded by the outer peripheral mark 812 is hidden behind the convex portion 811 adjacent to the observation direction side, and the latent image formed by the inner mark 813 is easily visible.
 ここで、図13a~図13eに示した偽造防止シート801においては、観察方向によって浮かび上がる潜像を構成する内マーク813が、シート基材802に形成された凸部811の側面811aの全周に渡って設けられているため、観察方向をシート基材802の平面部803の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、内マーク813による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。例えば、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を図13a中上側に変化させていくと、内マーク813によって構成される潜像「T」が、図16dに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を図13a中右側に変化させていくと、内マーク813によって構成される潜像「T」が、図16eに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向を図13a中左側に変化させていくと、内マーク813によって構成される潜像「T」が、図16fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Here, in the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 shown in FIGS. 13a to 13e, the inner mark 813 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the observation direction is formed on the entire circumference of the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811 formed on the sheet base material 802. Since the observation direction is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 to any direction, the latent image by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge. It becomes like this. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 13A, the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 16D. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is changed to the right side in FIG. 13a, the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 16e. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is changed to the left side in FIG. 13A, the latent image “T” formed by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 16F.
 上述した偽造防止シート801は、複写した場合、シート基材802の情報印刷領域804に印刷された情報や、シート基材802に印刷により設けられた外周マーク812及び内マーク813は複写されるものの、凸部811までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の観察方向を変えていった場合であっても、内マーク813による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート801においては、偽造防止シート801に対する観察方向をシート基材802の平面部803の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、内マーク813による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 804 of the sheet base material 802 and the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided by printing on the sheet base material 802 are copied. The convex portion 811 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the inner mark 813 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity. In this way, when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 801 of the present embodiment, in which direction the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 801 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 803 of the sheet base material 802 Even so, since the latent image by the inner mark 813 appears to emerge, it is possible to easily determine the authenticity of the latent image without being limited to the observation direction.
 なお、偽造防止構造810に設けられる外周マーク812及び内マーク813は、本形態のように幅が均一のものではなく、一部が幅方向に突出した形状であってもよい。また、内マーク813においては、図示した内マーク813の内側が全て着色された構成としてもよい。ただしその場合は、偽造防止シート801を正面から観察した場合に内マーク813を視認困難とするために凸部811の平面部803に対する形成角度を急峻なものとする必要がある。 It should be noted that the outer peripheral mark 812 and the inner mark 813 provided in the forgery prevention structure 810 are not uniform in width as in the present embodiment, and may have a shape partially protruding in the width direction. Further, the inner mark 813 may have a configuration in which the inner side of the illustrated inner mark 813 is all colored. However, in that case, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is observed from the front, the formation angle of the convex portion 811 with respect to the flat portion 803 needs to be steep in order to make the inner mark 813 difficult to see.
 また、凸部811においては、頂部811bがない円錐形のものやドーム型のものとすることも考えられる。なお、ドーム型のものにおいては、凸部のうち平面部803と略平行とならない領域を側面とし、その領域に内マーク813を設けることになる。 Further, the convex portion 811 may be conical or dome-shaped without the top portion 811b. Note that in the dome shape, a region that is not substantially parallel to the flat portion 803 of the convex portion is defined as a side surface, and an inner mark 813 is provided in that region.
 また、凸部811の平面部803に対する形成角度は、90度に近いほど、偽造防止シート801を正面から見た場合に、潜像を構成する内マーク813を見にくくすることができるが、その反面、平面部803の法線方向から観察方向を傾けていった場合に、観察方向が凸部811の側面811aと対向する前に、潜像を形成する内マーク813が観察方向側に隣接する凸部811によって隠れてしまい、上述した効果を得ることができないため、内マーク813の線幅やシート基材802の反射率等を考慮して適宜設定することが好ましい。 Further, the closer the formation angle of the convex portion 811 to the flat portion 803 is to 90 degrees, the more difficult it is to see the inner mark 813 constituting the latent image when the anti-counterfeit sheet 801 is viewed from the front. When the observation direction is inclined from the normal direction of the plane portion 803, the inner mark 813 forming the latent image is adjacent to the observation direction side before the observation direction faces the side surface 811a of the convex portion 811. Since it is hidden by the portion 811 and the above-described effect cannot be obtained, it is preferable to set appropriately considering the line width of the inner mark 813, the reflectance of the sheet base material 802, and the like.
 また、本形態においては、平面部803にエンボス部として凸部811を形成し、その凸部811の側面811aに内マーク813を設けているが、平面部803に平面部803から窪んだ凹部をエンボス部として設け、この凹部の内側面に内マーク813を設けてもよい。すなわち、本発明のエンボス部としては、平面部803に形成された凸部や凹部のいずれかを用いることができる。 In this embodiment, a convex portion 811 is formed as an embossed portion on the flat portion 803, and an inner mark 813 is provided on a side surface 811a of the convex portion 811. However, a concave portion recessed from the flat portion 803 is provided on the flat portion 803. It may be provided as an embossed portion, and an inner mark 813 may be provided on the inner side surface of this recess. That is, as the embossed portion of the present invention, either a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the flat surface portion 803 can be used.
 また、本形態において、内マーク813を周方向に分割し、分割された複数の領域のそれぞれの色を互いに異なるものとすることも考えられる。その場合、偽造防止構造810を観察する方向によって視認される色が変化するため、それによっても真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In this embodiment, it is also conceivable that the inner mark 813 is divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 810, it becomes possible to perform authenticity determination also by that.
 (第10の実施の形態)
 図17aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第10の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図17bは、図17aに示した偽造防止構造910の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図17cは、図17bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図17dは、図17bに示した文字部マーク912が設けられた凸部911の構成を示す図であり、図17eは、図17bに示した背景部マーク913が設けられた凸部911の構成を示す図である。
(Tenth embodiment)
FIG. 17a is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet as a tenth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 17b shows a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 910 shown in FIG. 17a. 17c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 17b, and FIG. 17d is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 911 provided with the character portion mark 912 shown in FIG. 17b. FIG. 17e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 911 provided with the background portion mark 913 shown in FIG. 17b.
 本形態の偽造防止シート901は図17a~図17eに示すように、紙からなるシート基材902の一部の領域に偽造防止構造910が設けられて構成されている。シート基材902は、基材表面となる平面部903を有し、この平面部903の一部の領域に情報印刷領域904が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造910が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート901は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域904に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材902の情報印刷領域904に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材902に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造910による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 As shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e, the forgery prevention sheet 901 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 910 in a partial region of a sheet base material 902 made of paper. The sheet base material 902 has a flat surface portion 903 serving as a base material surface, an information printing region 904 is provided in a partial region of the flat surface portion 903, and a forgery prevention structure 910 is provided in another region. . The counterfeit prevention sheet 901 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 904. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902, it may be possible to print a tint block as a pre-print on the sheet base material 902 or to color it in a predetermined color. In this case, it is necessary to prevent the latent image due to the forgery prevention structure 910 from being difficult to see.
 シート基材902に設けられた偽造防止構造910は図17bに示すように、シート基材902にマトリックス状に形成されたエンボス部である複数の凸部911と、この複数の凸部911のうち予め決められた凸部911のみに設けられた第1のマーク部である文字部マーク912と、複数の凸部911のうち文字部マーク912が設けられていない凸部911に設けられた第2のマーク部である背景部マーク913とから構成されている。凸部911は図17cに示すように、円錐から頂点の部分が取り除かれた形状であって、シート基材902の表面から平面部903の法線方向に0.1mm程度突出し、平面部903との境界部分が直径0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。この境界部分から離れていくに従ってその断面積が徐々に狭くなり、図17d及び図17eに示すように、境界部分の反対側は平面部903と平行な頂部911bとなっている。そのため、凸部911の側面911aは、平面部903の法線に対して斜めの方向を向いている。文字部マーク912は、複数の凸部911のうち予め決められた凸部911の側面911aの平面部903からの高さが第1の高さh1となる位置にて全周に渡って印刷によって設けられており、凸部911の平面部903との境界部分が円形状であり、また、この境界部分から離れていくに従って凸部911の断面積が徐々に狭くなることから、シート基材902の平面部903の法線方向から見た場合に円形状となっている。背景部マーク913は、複数の凸部911のうち文字部マーク912が設けられていない凸部911の側面911aの平面部903からの高さが第2の高さh2となる位置にて全周に渡って印刷によって設けられており、凸部911の平面部903との境界部分が円形状であり、また、この境界部分から離れていくに従って凸部911の断面積が徐々に狭くなることから、シート基材902の平面部903の法線方向から見た場合に円形状となっている。ここで、凸部911の側面911aにて文字部マーク912が設けられた高さh1と、背景部マーク913が設けられた高さh2とは、背景部マーク913が設けられた高さh2が文字部マーク912が設けられた高さh1よりも低くなっている。なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造910は、説明を簡単にするために縦横がそれぞれ10個ずつの凸部911が形成されたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造910によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 The anti-counterfeit structure 910 provided on the sheet base material 902 includes a plurality of convex portions 911 that are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base material 902, and the plurality of convex portions 911, as shown in FIG. A character part mark 912 that is a first mark part provided only on a predetermined convex part 911 and a second part provided on a convex part 911 that is not provided with the character part mark 912 among the plurality of convex parts 911. The background portion mark 913 is a mark portion. As shown in FIG. 17 c, the convex portion 911 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, protrudes about 0.1 mm from the surface of the sheet base material 902 in the normal direction of the flat portion 903, and the flat portion 903 The boundary portion is a circular shape having a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. As shown in FIGS. 17d and 17e, the opposite side of the boundary portion is a top portion 911b parallel to the flat portion 903. Therefore, the side surface 911 a of the convex portion 911 faces in an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 903. Character portion mark 912, the printing height from the plane portion 903 of the side surface 911a of the protrusion 911 to a predetermined one of the plurality of protrusions 911 over the entire circumference at a first height h 1 and a position Since the boundary portion between the convex portion 911 and the flat portion 903 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the convex portion 911 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the sheet base material When viewed from the normal direction of the plane portion 903 of 902, the shape is circular. Background marks 913, all at the level becomes the second height h 2 position from the planar portion 903 of the side surface 911a of the protrusion 911 character portion mark 912 is not provided among the plurality of protrusions 911 It is provided by printing over the circumference, and the boundary portion between the convex portion 911 and the flat surface portion 903 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the convex portion 911 gradually narrows as the distance from the boundary portion increases. Therefore, when viewed from the normal direction of the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902, the shape is circular. Here, the height h 1 at which the character portion mark 912 is provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 and the height h 2 at which the background portion mark 913 is provided are the height at which the background portion mark 913 is provided. h 2 is lower than the height h 1 at which the character mark 912 is provided. Note that the anti-counterfeit structure 910 illustrated in the present embodiment is formed with ten convex portions 911 each in vertical and horizontal directions for the sake of simplicity of explanation. Characters that become latent images that can be lifted by the forgery prevention structure 910 can be made minute, and curves and the like can be easily expressed.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート901の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the forgery prevention sheet 901 configured as described above will be described.
 図18a及び図18bは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901の製造方法を説明するための図であり、シート基材902のうち偽造防止構造910が設けられる領域のみを示す。 FIGS. 18a and 18b are views for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e, and show only the region of the sheet base material 902 where the forgery prevention structure 910 is provided.
 まず、図18aに示すように、シート基材902の偽造防止構造910が設けられる領域に、文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913をそれぞれ円形状に印刷する。文字部マーク912は、凸部911が設けられる10×10のマトリックス状の領域のうち潜像となる「T」を形成する位置に印刷し、背景部マーク913は、10×10のマトリックス状の領域のうち文字部マーク912が印刷されない位置に印刷する。文字部マーク912と背景部マーク913とは、互いに相似形であって、その径は、文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913が設けられた領域に凸部911を形成した際に、上述したように平面部903からの高さが背景部マーク913の方が文字部マーク912よりも低くなるように、文字部マーク912の径の方が背景部マーク913の径よりも小さくなっている。これら文字部マーク912と背景部マーク913との組み合わせは、偽造防止構造910によって浮かび上がる潜像(本形態においては「T」)に応じて予め設定されており、印刷データとして与えられる。また、これら文字部マーク912と背景部マーク913の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, as shown in FIG. 18a, the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are each printed in a circular shape in the region where the forgery prevention structure 910 of the sheet base material 902 is provided. The character part mark 912 is printed at a position where a “T” that becomes a latent image is formed in a 10 × 10 matrix area where the convex part 911 is provided, and the background part mark 913 is printed in a 10 × 10 matrix form. Printing is performed at a position in the area where the character mark 912 is not printed. The character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are similar to each other, and the diameter thereof is as described above when the convex part 911 is formed in the region where the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are provided. Further, the diameter of the character mark 912 is smaller than the diameter of the background mark 913 so that the height from the plane part 903 is lower than that of the character mark 912 in the background mark 913. The combination of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 910 and is given as print data. Further, the printing of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 may be performed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above, or may be performed after the pre-printing is performed.
 次に、図18bに示すように、文字部マーク912が印刷された領域と背景部マーク913が印刷された領域とのそれぞれに、エンボス版を用いて複数の凸部911を形成する。この際、凸部911は、文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913の外側がそれぞれ平面部903との境界部分となるように形成され、それにより、文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913はそれぞれ、凸部911の側面911aの全周に渡って設けられた形状となる。 Next, as shown in FIG. 18b, a plurality of convex portions 911 are formed using an embossed plate in each of the region where the character portion mark 912 is printed and the region where the background portion mark 913 is printed. At this time, the convex part 911 is formed so that the outside of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 is a boundary part with the flat part 903, respectively, whereby the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are respectively It becomes the shape provided over the perimeter of the side surface 911a of the convex part 911.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート901が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材902の情報印刷領域904に印刷されて使用されることになる。 As described above, the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is manufactured, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902 and used.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート901の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the forgery prevention sheet 901 described above will be described.
 まず、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901を正面、すなわち、シート基材902の平面部903の法線方向から観察した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 will be described.
 図19aは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901を正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図であり、図19bは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901を正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造910における文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 19a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front, and FIG. 19b is shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 in the forgery prevention structure 910 at the time of observing the forgery prevention sheet 901 from the front.
 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901を、図19aに示すように、正面、すなわち平面部903の法線方向から観察した場合、複数の凸部911にそれぞれ設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913は、観察方向から遮るものが存在しないため、図19bに示すように全ての文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913が視認されることとなる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the plane portion 903, as shown in FIG. 19a, the character portion marks 912 provided on the plurality of convex portions 911, respectively. In addition, since the background mark 913 is not obstructed from the observation direction, all the character mark 912 and the background mark 913 are visually recognized as shown in FIG. 19b.
 文字部マーク912と背景部マーク913とは、凸部911の側面911aにおいて平面部903からの高さが互いに異なるように設けられているものの、互いに相似形であり、かつ、偽造防止シート901を正面から観察した場合はその高さ方向から観察されることとなり、それにより、文字部マーク912と背景部マーク913とが略同一の形状として認識され、同一形状のマークが並んで形成されているものとして認識される。これは凸部911が微細であるほどこれらが略同一の形状として認識されやすくなる。 The character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 are similar to each other in the side surface 911a of the convex part 911 so that the height from the flat part 903 is different from each other, and the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is provided. When observed from the front, it is observed from the height direction, whereby the character mark 912 and the background mark 913 are recognized as substantially the same shape, and the marks of the same shape are formed side by side. It is recognized as a thing. As the convex portion 911 is finer, these are more easily recognized as substantially the same shape.
 次に、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材902の平面部903の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, the operation when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 will be described.
 図20aは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図であり、図20bは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合に背景部マーク913が見えなくなる時の平面部903に対する観察方向の角度θ1を示す図であり、図20cは、図20bに示した角度θ1にて文字部マーク912を見た状態を示す図であり、図20d~図20gは、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合における偽造防止構造910における文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 20a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction of the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 20c is a diagram showing an angle θ 1 of the observation direction with respect to the plane portion 903 when the background mark 913 is not visible when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIG. FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a state where the character mark 912 is viewed at an angle θ 1 shown in FIG. 20B, and FIGS. 20D to 20G are front views of the forgery prevention sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17A to 17E. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 in the forgery prevention structure 910 in the case of changing from to.
 図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度が鋭角になっていく。そして、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度が、図20bに示すように角度θ1よりも小さくなると、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913のうち背景部マーク913が、その背景部マーク913が設けられた凸部911の観察方向側に隣接する凸部911によって隠れて見えなくなる。なお、背景部マーク913が凸部911によって隠れて見えなくなる角度θ1は、図20bに示すように、背景部マーク913と、その背景部マーク913が設けられた凸部911の観察方向側に隣接する凸部911の頂部911bの端部との間の平面部903と平行となる方向についての距離をw1、背景部マーク913と凸部911の平面部903に対する高さの差をt1とすると、角度θ1=tan-1(t1/w1)で表される。 When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e is changed from the front, the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 becomes an acute angle. When the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is smaller than the angle θ 1 as shown in FIG. 20b, the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911. Of the 913, the background mark 913 is hidden by the protrusion 911 adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusion 911 provided with the background mark 913 and is not visible. Note that the angle θ 1 at which the background mark 913 is hidden by the convex portion 911 and becomes invisible is, as shown in FIG. 20B, on the observation direction side of the background mark 913 and the convex portion 911 provided with the background mark 913. The distance in the direction parallel to the plane part 903 between the end part of the top part 911b of the adjacent convex part 911 is w 1 , and the height difference between the background mark 913 and the convex part 911 with respect to the flat part 903 is t 1. Then, the angle θ 1 = tan −1 (t 1 / w 1 ) is expressed.
 一方、文字部マーク912においては、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度が、背景部マーク913が見えなくなる角度θ1となった場合においても、図20cに示すように、その文字部マーク912が設けられた凸部911の観察方向側に隣接する凸部911によって隠れない。 On the other hand, in the character part mark 912, even when the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat part 903 of the sheet base material 902 becomes the angle θ 1 at which the background part mark 913 cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. The convex portion 911 provided with the character mark 912 is not hidden by the convex portion 911 adjacent to the observation direction side.
 そのため、偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を、例えば図17a中下側に変化させていき、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度がθ1よりも小さくなると、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913のうち、全ての文字部マーク912と観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部911の側面911aに設けられた背景部マーク913のみが見えることになり、図20dに示すように、この文字部マーク912によって構成される潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Therefore, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is changed to, for example, the lower side in FIG. 17A and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is smaller than θ 1 , the side surface of the convex portion 911 Of the character mark 912 and the background mark 913 provided on the 911a, only the character mark 912 and the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex part 911 constituting the row closest to the observation direction can be seen. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20d, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 912 appears to appear.
 ここで、図17a~図17eに示した偽造防止シート901においては、観察方向によって浮かび上がる潜像を構成する文字部マーク912が、シート基材902に形成された凸部911の側面911aの全周に渡って設けられ、かつ、複数の凸部911がマトリックス状に形成されているため、シート基材902の平面部903と観察方向とのなす角度がθ1よりも小さければ、どの方向から観察した場合であっても、文字部マーク912による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。例えば、偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を図17a中上側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク912によって構成される潜像「T」が図20eに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を図17a中右側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク912によって構成される潜像「T」が図20fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向を図17a中左側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク912によって構成される潜像「T」が図20fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Here, in the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 shown in FIGS. 17a to 17e, the character part marks 912 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the observation direction are formed on the entire side surface 911a of the convex part 911 formed on the sheet base material 902. Since the plurality of convex portions 911 are provided in a matrix shape, the direction from which direction the plane portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction are smaller than θ 1 is provided. Even when it is observed, the latent image by the character mark 912 appears to appear. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 17A, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 912 appears to appear as shown in FIG. 20E. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is changed to the right side in FIG. 17a, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 912 appears to appear as shown in FIG. 20f. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 901 is changed to the left side in FIG. 17A, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 912 appears to appear as shown in FIG. 20F.
 なお、上述したどの方向から観察した場合においても、マトリックス状に形成された凸部911のうち観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部911においては、側面911aに設けられた背景部マーク913が視認可能な状態となるが、凸部911の数が多かったり、図20d~図20gに示したように文字部マーク912によって構成される潜像の線幅がその背景部マーク913による線幅よりも太かったりすること等によってこの背景部マーク913が潜像とは無関係であることが認識できればよい。もし、観察方向最も手前の列を構成する凸部911の側面911aに設けられた背景部マーク913によって潜像が不明瞭となるような場合は、潜像を構成する文字部マーク912を、マトリックス状に形成された複数の凸部911のうち、周囲から離れた凸部911に設ける等すればよい。 Note that, in any of the above-described observations from any direction, in the projections 911 that form the row closest to the observation direction among the projections 911 formed in a matrix, the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a is Although visible, the number of convex portions 911 is large, or the line width of the latent image formed by the character mark 912 is larger than the line width of the background mark 913 as shown in FIGS. 20d to 20g. It is only necessary to recognize that the background mark 913 is irrelevant to the latent image by being thick. If the latent image is obscured by the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 that forms the foremost row in the observation direction, the character mark 912 that forms the latent image is displayed in the matrix. Of the plurality of convex portions 911 formed in a shape, the convex portions 911 separated from the periphery may be provided.
 シート基材902の平面部903と観察方向とのなす角度がθ1よりも小さければ、上述したように、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913のうち背景部マーク913が隠れて見えなくなるが、シート基材902の平面部903と観察方向とのなす角度をさらに小さくしていき、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度が、図20cに示すように角度θ2よりも小さくなると、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた文字部マーク912までもが、その文字部マーク912が設けられた凸部911の観察方向側に隣接する凸部911によって隠れて見えなくなってしまう。すなわち、シート基材902の平面部903に対する観察方向のなす角度θが、θ2≦θ≦θ1である場合に、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913のうち文字部マーク912のみが視認可能となることにより潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えることになる。なお、文字部マーク912が凸部911によって隠れて見えなくなる角度θ2は、図20cに示すように、文字部マーク912と、その文字部マーク912が設けられた凸部911の観察方向側に隣接する凸部911の頂部911bの端部との間の平面部903と平行となる方向についての距離をw2、文字部マーク912と凸部911の平面部903に対する高さの差をt2とすると、角度θ2=tan-1(t2/w2)で表される。 If the angle formed between the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction is smaller than θ 1, the background of the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 as described above. Although the part mark 913 is hidden and cannot be seen, the angle formed by the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 and the observation direction is further reduced, and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is as shown in FIG. When the angle θ 2 is smaller than the angle θ 2 , even the character mark 912 provided on the side surface 911 a of the protrusion 911 is adjacent to the observation direction side of the protrusion 911 provided with the character mark 912. The part 911 hides and cannot be seen. That is, when the angle θ formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat surface portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 is θ 2 ≦ θ ≦ θ 1 , the character portion mark 912 and the background portion mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911. Among them, only the character part mark 912 becomes visible, so that the latent image “T” appears to appear. It should be noted that the angle θ 2 at which the character mark 912 is hidden by the convex portion 911 and becomes invisible is, as shown in FIG. 20c, on the observation direction side of the character mark 912 and the convex portion 911 provided with the character mark 912. The distance in the direction parallel to the plane portion 903 between the end portion of the top portion 911b of the adjacent convex portion 911 is w 2 , and the height difference between the character portion mark 912 and the convex portion 911 with respect to the plane portion 903 is t 2. Then, the angle θ 2 = tan −1 (t 2 / w 2 ) is expressed.
 上述した偽造防止シート901は、複写した場合、シート基材902の情報印刷領域904に印刷された情報や、シート基材902に印刷により設けられた文字部マーク912及び背景部マーク913は複写されるものの、凸部911までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の観察方向を変えていった場合であっても、文字部マーク912による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート901においては、偽造防止シート901に対する観察方向をシート基材902の平面部903の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、文字部マーク912による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 When the forgery prevention sheet 901 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 904 of the sheet base material 902 and the character part mark 912 and the background part mark 913 provided by printing on the sheet base material 902 are copied. However, the convex portion 911 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even if the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the character mark 912 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity. In this way, when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 901 of the present embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 901 is changed in any direction from the normal direction of the flat portion 903 of the sheet base material 902 Even so, since the latent image by the character mark 912 appears to emerge, it is possible to easily determine whether the latent image is authentic without being limited to the observation direction.
 なお、本形態において、偽造防止構造910に設けられる文字部マーク912、背景部マーク913及び外周マーク914は、本形態のように幅が均一のものではなく、一部が幅方向に突出した形状であってもよい。また、破線で繋がれたものであってもよい。 In this embodiment, the character mark 912, the background mark 913, and the outer peripheral mark 914 provided in the forgery prevention structure 910 are not uniform in width as in this embodiment, and a part of the mark protrudes in the width direction. It may be. Further, it may be connected by a broken line.
 また、文字部マーク912が設けられる領域は、凸部911の側面911aでなくても、凸部911の頂部911bであってもよい。その場合も、文字部マーク912は、平面部903に対する高さが凸部911の背景部マーク913が設けられた高さより高くなり、また、背景部マーク913と相似形とする必要がある。 Further, the region where the character mark 912 is provided may not be the side surface 911a of the convex portion 911 but the top portion 911b of the convex portion 911. Also in that case, the height of the character part mark 912 with respect to the flat part 903 is higher than the height at which the background part mark 913 of the convex part 911 is provided, and it is necessary to have a similar shape to the background part mark 913.
 また、凸部911においては、円柱形のものや頂部911bがない円錐形のものやドーム型のものとすることも考えられる。また、断面が矩形状となるものとすることも考えられる。ただし、凹部911の平面部903との境界部分が円形状のように中心からの距離が略一定となるものであり、それに伴って文字部マーク912も円形状のように中心からの距離が略一定となるものとした方が、どの方向から観察しても視認可能となる文字部マーク912の形状が同一となり、文字部マーク912によって浮かび上がる潜像の精細な形状を均一化することができる。ただし、平面部903に対する形成角度においては、凸部911の側面911aに設けられた背景部マーク913を観察方向側に隣接する凸部911によって隠れやすくするために、平面部903の法線方向に平行に突出するように形成し、凸部911のそれぞれを円柱等の柱状に形成することが好ましい。 Also, the convex portion 911 may be a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without the top portion 911b, or a dome shape. It is also conceivable that the cross section is rectangular. However, the distance from the center is substantially constant such that the boundary portion of the concave portion 911 with the flat surface portion 903 is circular, and accordingly, the distance from the center is approximately the same as the character mark 912 is also circular. The shape of the character mark 912 that can be visually recognized from any direction becomes the same when it is made constant, and the fine shape of the latent image that appears by the character mark 912 can be made uniform. . However, in order to make the background mark 913 provided on the side surface 911a of the convex part 911 easier to hide by the convex part 911 adjacent to the observation direction side at the formation angle with respect to the flat part 903, it is in the normal direction of the flat part 903. Preferably, the protrusions 911 are formed so as to protrude in parallel, and each of the convex portions 911 is formed in a columnar shape such as a cylinder.
 また、本形態に示したものにおいては、凸部911における文字部マーク912の高さが背景部マーク913の高さよりも高くなっているが、背景部マーク913の高さを文字部マーク912の高さよりも高くし、潜像が白抜き文字として浮かび上がるような構成とすることも考えられる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the height of the character mark 912 in the convex portion 911 is higher than the height of the background mark 913, but the height of the background mark 913 is set to the height of the character mark 912. It can be considered that the height is higher than the height so that the latent image emerges as white characters.
 また、本形態において、文字部マーク912を周方向に分割し、分割された複数の領域のそれぞれの色を互いに異なるものとすることも考えられる。その場合、偽造防止構造910を観察する方向によって視認される色が変化するため、それによっても真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In this embodiment, it is also conceivable that the character mark 912 is divided in the circumferential direction so that the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 910, it becomes possible to perform authenticity determination also by that.
 また、本願で言う相似形とは、一般に言う図形の相似形の他に、円形状のものに対して、円周の一部が少し途切れたものや、円周の一部が少し歪んだものや、全体が少々楕円になったり三角形や四角形に近づく形状に少々歪んだりしたものも相似形として定義する。 In addition, the similar shape referred to in the present application is not only a general shape similar shape but also a circular shape with a part of the circumference cut off or a part of the circumference slightly distorted. Also, a shape that is slightly elliptical or slightly distorted to a shape that approaches a triangle or a rectangle is defined as a similar shape.
 (第11の実施の形態)
 図21aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第11の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図21bは、図21aに示した偽造防止構造1010の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図21cは、図21bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図21dは、図21bに示した第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の構成を示す図であり、図21eは、図21bに示した第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の構成を示す図である。
(Eleventh embodiment)
FIG. 21a is a diagram showing the overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as the eleventh embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 21b shows the detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 shown in FIG. 21a. FIG. 21c is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA ′ shown in FIG. 21b, and FIG. 21d is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group shown in FIG. 21b. FIG. 21e is a diagram showing a configuration of the convex portion 1011 that constitutes the second convex portion group shown in FIG. 21b.
 本形態の偽造防止シート1001は図21a~図21eに示すように、紙からなるシート基材1002の一部の領域に偽造防止構造1010が設けられて構成されている。シート基材1002は、平面部1003を有し、この平面部1003の一部の領域に情報印刷領域1004が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造1010が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート1001は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域1004に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材1002の情報印刷領域1004に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材1002に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造1010による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 21. As shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e, the forgery prevention sheet 1001 of this embodiment is configured by providing a forgery prevention structure 1010 in a partial region of a sheet base material 1002 made of paper. The sheet base material 1002 has a flat portion 1003, an information printing region 1004 is provided in a partial region of the flat portion 1003, and a forgery prevention structure 1010 is provided in another region. The counterfeit prevention sheet 1001 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In this case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, etc. are printed in the information printing area 1004. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 1002 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary that the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 1010 is not difficult to see.
 シート基材1002に設けられた偽造防止構造1010は図21bに示すように、シート基材1002にエンボス部である複数の凸部1011がマトリックス状に形成されるとともに、その凸部1011のそれぞれに重なるようにマーク1012,1013が印刷されて構成されている。この凸部1011は、図21c~図21eに示すように、円錐から頂点の部分が取り除かれた形状であって、シート基材1002をエンボス版等で平面部1003側から0.05~0.1mm程度窪ませることにより側面1011aが形成され、平面部1003との同一面が頂部1011bとなっている。そして、この頂部1011bからシート基材1002の窪み方向に向かうに従ってその断面積が徐々に広くなり、凸部1011の底部においては、直径が0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。 In the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 provided on the sheet base material 1002, as shown in FIG. 21b, a plurality of convex portions 1011 which are embossed portions are formed in a matrix shape on the sheet base material 1002, and each of the convex portions 1011 is formed. Marks 1012 and 1013 are printed so as to overlap. As shown in FIGS. 21c to 21e, the convex portion 1011 has a shape in which the apex portion is removed from the cone, and the sheet base material 1002 is 0.05 to 0. A side surface 1011a is formed by being recessed by about 1 mm, and the same surface as the flat portion 1003 is a top portion 1011b. The cross-sectional area gradually increases from the top portion 1011b toward the recess direction of the sheet base material 1002, and the bottom portion of the convex portion 1011 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less.
 複数の凸部1011は、側面1011aにマーク1013が形成された第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011と、側面1011aにマーク1012が形成された第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011とからなる。第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011に形成されたマーク1013と、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011に形成されたマーク1012とは、それぞれ凸部1011の側面1011aの全周に渡って形成されており、マーク部1013の線幅がマーク部1012の線幅よりも太くなっている。これにより、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011とは、同一方向から観察した場合に側面1011aにおける配色割合が互いに異なっている。マーク1013が形成された第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011は、マトリックス状に形成された複数の凸部1011のうち、潜像となる「T」を表現する位置に配置されたものであり、また、その他の凸部1011が第2の凸部群を構成するものとなる。 The plurality of convex portions 1011 includes a convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed on the side surface 1011a and a convex portion constituting the second convex portion group in which the mark 1012 is formed on the side surface 1011a. 1011. The mark 1013 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the mark 1012 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group are all of the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011. The line width of the mark portion 1013 is larger than the line width of the mark portion 1012. Thereby, the convex part 1011 which comprises a 1st convex part group, and the convex part 1011 which comprises a 2nd convex part group differ from each other in the coloration ratio in the side surface 1011a, when observed from the same direction. The convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed is arranged at a position expressing the latent image “T” among the plurality of convex portions 1011 formed in a matrix. Moreover, the other convex part 1011 comprises a 2nd convex part group.
 なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造1010は、説明を簡単にするために100個の凸部1011が10×10のマトリックス状に形成され、その100個の凸部1011にマーク1012あるいはマーク1013が形成されたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造1010によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 Note that in the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 illustrated in this embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, 100 convex portions 1011 are formed in a 10 × 10 matrix, and the 100 convex portions 1011 have marks 1012 or marks. 1013 is formed, but the larger the number, the finer the character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by this anti-counterfeit structure 1010, expressing a curve or the like. It becomes easy.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート1001の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 configured as described above will be described.
 まず、シート基材1002の偽造防止構造1010が設けられる領域に、円形状の複数のマーク1012,1013を10×10のマトリックス状に印刷する。マーク1013は、10×10のマトリックス状のうち、「T」を形成する位置に印刷し、マーク1012は、それ以外の位置に印刷する。これらマーク1012,1013の組み合わせは、偽造防止構造1010によって浮かび上がる潜像(本形態においては「T」)に応じて予め設定されており、印刷データとして与えられる。また、これらマーク1012,1013の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, a plurality of circular marks 1012 and 1013 are printed in a 10 × 10 matrix in a region where the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 of the sheet base material 1002 is provided. The mark 1013 is printed at a position where “T” is formed in a 10 × 10 matrix, and the mark 1012 is printed at other positions. A combination of these marks 1012 and 1013 is set in advance according to a latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 1010 and is given as print data. The marks 1012 and 1013 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
 次に、マーク1012,1013が印刷された領域に、シート基材1002の平面部1003側からエンボス版を押し付けることにより複数の凸部1011を形成する。このエンボス版による凸部1011のピッチとマーク1012,1013のピッチとは同一であって、凸部1011をマーク1012,1013に重なるように形成することにより、マーク部1012,1013がそれぞれ凸部1011の側面1011aの全周に渡って形成された状態となる。 Next, a plurality of convex portions 1011 are formed by pressing the embossed plate from the flat portion 1003 side of the sheet base material 1002 to the area where the marks 1012 and 1013 are printed. The pitch of the convex portions 1011 by the embossed plate is the same as the pitch of the marks 1012 and 1013, and the convex portions 1011 are formed so as to overlap the marks 1012 and 1013, so that the mark portions 1012 and 1013 are respectively convex portions 1011. It will be in the state formed over the perimeter of side surface 1011a.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート1001が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材1002の情報印刷領域1004に印刷されて使用されることになる。 The anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and used.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート1001の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the above-described anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 will be described.
 まず、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面、すなわち、シート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向から観察した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002 will be described.
 図22aは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011における光の反射を示す図であり、図22bは、図22aに示した光の反射によるマーク1013の見え方を示す図であり、図22cは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011における光の反射を示す図であり、図22dは、図22cに示した光の反射によるマーク1012の見え方を示す図であり、図22eは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001の偽造防止構造1010におけるマーク1012,1013の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 22a is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group for explaining the operation when the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. 22b is a diagram showing how the mark 1013 appears due to the reflection of light shown in FIG. 22a, and FIG. 22c shows the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front. FIG. 22d is a diagram showing the reflection of light in the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group for explanation, and FIG. 22d is a diagram showing how the mark 1012 is seen by the reflection of light shown in FIG. FIG. 22e is a diagram showing how the marks 1012 and 1013 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1010 of the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e.
 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合、シート基材1002に形成された凸部1011の側面1011aにおいては、観察方向に対向しない状態となっているため、観察方向からの光は観察方向以外の方向にも反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が少なくなる。偽造防止構造1010に設けられたマーク1013は、凸部1011の側面1011aに設けられているため、図22aの破線で示すように観察方向からの光がマーク1013上で観察方向以外にも反射して分散し、それにより、図22bに示すようにマーク1013は薄くしか見えない状態となる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front, the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002 is not opposed to the observation direction. Is reflected also in directions other than the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light is reduced. Since the mark 1013 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011, light from the observation direction is reflected on the mark 1013 in the direction other than the observation direction as indicated by a broken line in FIG. As a result, the mark 1013 can only be seen thin as shown in FIG. 22b.
 また、偽造防止構造1010に設けられたマーク1012においても同様に、凸部1011の側面1011aに設けられているため、偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合、図22cの破線で示すように観察方向からの光がマーク1012上で観察方向以外にも反射して分散し、それにより、図22dに示すようにマーク1012は薄くしか見えない状態となる。 Similarly, the mark 1012 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is also provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011. Therefore, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is observed from the front, it is observed as indicated by a broken line in FIG. 22c. Light from the direction is reflected and dispersed on the mark 1012 in directions other than the viewing direction, so that the mark 1012 can only be seen thin as shown in FIG. 22d.
 そのため、偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合は、図22eに示すように、マーク1012,1013が薄くしか見えないことにより、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の側面1011aにおけるマーク1013による配色割合と、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の側面1011aにおけるマーク1012による配色割合との違いがはっきりとは認識されず、それにより、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011とが曖昧にしか識別することができず、側面1011aにマーク1013が形成された第1の凸部群を形成する凸部1011による潜像「T」がはっきりとは認識されない。また、凸部1011の側面1011aの平面部1003に対してなす角度が90度に近ければ、凸部1011の側面1011aに形成されたマーク1012とマーク1013とは、線幅が互いに異なるものの、偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合、その線幅の違いが認識されにくく、それによっても、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011とが曖昧にしか識別することができない。 Therefore, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is observed from the front, as shown in FIG. 22e, the marks 1012 and 1013 can only be seen thin, so that the mark on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group. The difference between the color arrangement ratio by 1013 and the color arrangement ratio by the mark 1012 on the side surface 1011a of the convex part 1011 constituting the second convex part group is not clearly recognized, thereby constituting the first convex part group. The convex portion 1011 and the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group can only be vaguely identified, and the convex portion 1011 that forms the first convex portion group in which the mark 1013 is formed on the side surface 1011a. The latent image “T” is not clearly recognized. Further, if the angle formed by the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 with respect to the flat surface portion 1003 is close to 90 degrees, the mark 1012 and the mark 1013 formed on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 have different line widths, but they are counterfeit. When the prevention sheet 1001 is observed from the front, the difference in the line width is difficult to recognize, and accordingly, the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group Can only be vaguely identified.
 このように、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合は、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011による潜像「T」は認識されにくくなっている。 Thus, when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is observed from the front, the latent image “T” formed by the convex portions 1011 constituting the first convex portion group is difficult to be recognized.
 次に、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, the operation when the observation direction for the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002 will be described.
 図23aは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011における光の反射を示す図であり、図23bは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011における光の反射を示す図であり、図23c~図23fは、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の偽造防止構造1010におけるマーク1012,1013の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 23a is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. FIG. 23b is a diagram showing light reflection at the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. FIGS. 23c to 23f are diagrams showing how the marks 1012 and 1013 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1010 when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front. is there.
 図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、その観察方向が、シート基材1002に形成された凸部1011の側面1011aに対向する方向に近づいていく。すると、凸部1011の側面1011aにおいては、観察方向からの光が観察方向にそのまま反射してこの反射光の観察方向における受光量が多くなる。偽造防止構造1010に設けられたマーク1013は、シート基材1002に形成された凸部1011の側面1011aに設けられているため、図23aの一点鎖線で示すように観察方向からの光がマーク1013上で観察方向に反射し、それにより、マーク1013が明確に見えるようになる。 When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 illustrated in FIGS. 21a to 21e is changed from the front, the observation direction approaches a direction facing the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002. Go. Then, on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011, light from the observation direction is reflected as it is in the observation direction, and the amount of received light in the observation direction of the reflected light increases. Since the mark 1013 provided on the forgery prevention structure 1010 is provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002, the light from the observation direction is irradiated with the mark 1013 as shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. Reflects upward in the viewing direction, thereby making the mark 1013 clearly visible.
 また、偽造防止構造1010に設けられたマーク1012においても、シート基材1002に形成された凸部1011の側面1011aに設けられているため、図23bの一点鎖線で示すように観察方向からの光がマーク1012上で観察方向に反射し、それにより、マーク1012が明確に見えるようになる。 Further, since the mark 1012 provided on the anti-counterfeit structure 1010 is also provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002, the light from the observation direction as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. Is reflected in the viewing direction on the mark 1012 so that the mark 1012 can be clearly seen.
 そのため、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を、例えば図21a中下側に変化させていくと図23cに示すように、マーク1012とマーク1013との線幅の違い、すなわち、この線幅の違いによる第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の側面1011aにおける配色割合と第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の側面1011aにおける配色割合との違いが明確となり、それにより、マーク1013が形成された凸部1011によって構成される潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。またこの際、凸部1011を近接して形成したり、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向をシート基材1002の法線方向から大きく変化させたりした場合、第2の凸部群を構成する凸部1011の側面1011aに形成されたマーク1012が、その凸部1011の観察方向側に隣接する凸部1011によって隠れて見えなくなり、マーク1013による潜像が視認しやすくなる。この効果は、マーク1012が凸部1011の頂部1011bから離れた領域に形成されていればいるほど得やすいものである。 Therefore, if the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is changed to the lower side in FIG. 21a, for example, as shown in FIG. 23c, the line width difference between the mark 1012 and the mark 1013, that is, the line width difference. The difference between the color arrangement ratio on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group and the color arrangement ratio on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 constituting the second convex portion group is clarified. The latent image “T” formed by the formed convex portion 1011 appears to appear floating. At this time, when the convex portion 1011 is formed in the vicinity, or when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 is greatly changed from the normal direction of the sheet base material 1002, the convex portion constituting the second convex portion group. The mark 1012 formed on the side surface 1011a of the 1011 is hidden by the convex portion 1011 adjacent to the observation direction side of the convex portion 1011 so that the latent image formed by the mark 1013 is easily visible. This effect is easier to obtain as the mark 1012 is formed in a region away from the top 1011b of the convex portion 1011.
 ここで、図21a~図21eに示した偽造防止シート101においては、観察方向によって潜像を浮かび上がらせるためのマーク1012,1013が、それぞれ、シート基材1002に形成された凸部1011の側面1011aの全周に渡って設けられており、かつ、マーク1012が形成された凸部1011の側面1011aにおけるマーク1012による配色割合と、マーク1013が形成された凸部1011の側面1011aにおけるマーク1013による配色割合とが、同一方向から観察した場合に互いに異なるものとなっているため、観察方向をシート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。例えば、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を図21a中上側に変化させていくと、マーク1013によって構成される潜像「T」が、図23dに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を図21a中右側に変化させていくと、マーク1013によって構成される潜像「T」が、図23eに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を図21a中左側に変化させていくと、マーク1013によって構成される潜像「T」が、図23fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Here, in the anti-counterfeit sheet 101 shown in FIGS. 21a to 21e, the marks 1012 and 1013 for raising the latent image depending on the observation direction are respectively provided on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 formed on the sheet base material 1002. The coloration ratio by the mark 1012 on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 on which the mark 1012 is formed and the color scheme by the mark 1013 on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 on which the mark 1013 is formed. Since the ratios are different from each other when observed from the same direction, even if the observation direction is changed in any direction from the normal direction of the planar portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002, The latent image emerges and appears. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 21a, the latent image “T” formed by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23d. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is changed to the right side in FIG. 21a, the latent image “T” formed by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23e. When the observation direction with respect to the sheet 1001 is changed to the left side in FIG. 21a, the latent image “T” constituted by the mark 1013 appears to emerge as shown in FIG. 23f.
 上述した偽造防止シート1001は、複写した場合、シート基材1002の情報印刷領域1004に印刷された情報や、シート基材1002に印刷により設けられたマーク1012,1013は複写されるものの、凸部1011までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の観察方向を変えていった場合であっても、マーク1012,1013の見え方が変化することがなく、マーク1013による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート1001においては、偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向をシート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、マーク1012,1013の見え方が変化してマーク1013による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。また、凸部1011が、シート基材1002の平面部1003を窪ませることによって形成されているため、シート基材1002を表裏から見た場合や、直接触れた場合において、凸部10011が認識されにくく、凸部1011が再現しにくいものとなり、偽造防止機能を向上させることができる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and the marks 1012 and 1013 provided by printing on the sheet base material 1002 are copied. Up to 1011 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even when the observation direction of the copy is changed, the appearance of the marks 1012 and 1013 does not change, and the latent image by the mark 1013 does not appear, so that authenticity determination is performed. Is possible. In this way, when performing authenticity determination, in the forgery prevention sheet 1001 of this embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1001 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002 to which direction Even so, since the appearance of the marks 1012 and 1013 changes and the latent image by the mark 1013 appears to appear, it is possible to easily determine the authenticity of the latent image without being limited to the observation direction. Further, since the convex portion 1011 is formed by recessing the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002, the convex portion 10011 is recognized when the sheet base material 1002 is viewed from the front or back side or directly touched. Therefore, the convex portion 1011 is difficult to reproduce, and the forgery prevention function can be improved.
 なお、偽造防止構造1010に設けられるマーク1012,1013のうち、第1の凸部群を構成する凸部1011に形成されるマーク1013は、凸部1011の側面1011aのみではなく、頂部1011bにも形成されていてもよい。 Of the marks 1012 and 1013 provided on the forgery prevention structure 1010, the mark 1013 formed on the convex portion 1011 constituting the first convex portion group is not only on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 but also on the top portion 1011b. It may be formed.
 なお、本形態においては、潜像「T」を表現する凸部1011の側面1011aに形成された第1の凸部群を構成するマーク部1013の線幅が、その他の凸部1011の側面1011aに形成された第2の凸部群を構成するマーク部1012の線幅よりも太いものを例に挙げて説明したが、第1の凸部群を構成するマーク部1013の線幅と、第2の凸部群を構成するマーク部1012の線幅とが互いに異なるものであれば、第1の凸部群を構成するマーク部1013の線幅が、第2の凸部群を構成するマーク部1012の線幅よりも細いものであってもよい。 In this embodiment, the line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the first convex portion group formed on the side surface 1011a of the convex portion 1011 expressing the latent image “T” is equal to the side surface 1011a of the other convex portion 1011. The line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the second convex portion group is described as an example, but the line width of the mark portion 1013 constituting the first convex portion group is If the line widths of the mark portions 1012 constituting the second convex portion group are different from each other, the line widths of the mark portions 1013 constituting the first convex portion group are marks constituting the second convex portion group. It may be narrower than the line width of the portion 1012.
 また、本形態において、マーク1013を周方向に分割し、分割された複数の領域のそれぞれの色を互いに異なるものとすることも考えられる。その場合、偽造防止構造1010を観察する方向によって視認される色が変化するため、それによっても真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。 In this embodiment, it is also conceivable that the mark 1013 is divided in the circumferential direction, and the colors of the divided areas are different from each other. In that case, since the color visually recognized changes with the direction which observes the forgery prevention structure 1010, it also becomes possible to perform authenticity determination by it.
 (第12の実施の形態)
 図24aは、本発明の偽造防止媒体の第12の実施の形態となる偽造防止シートの全体の構成を示す図であり、図24bは、図24aに示した偽造防止構造1110の詳細な構成を示す図であり、図24cは、図24bに示したA-A’断面図であり、図24dは、図24bに示した文字部マーク1112が設けられた凹部1111の構成を示す図であり、図24eは、図24bに示した背景部マーク1113が設けられた凹部1111の構成を示す図である。
(Twelfth embodiment)
FIG. 24a is a diagram showing an overall configuration of an anti-counterfeit sheet serving as a twelfth embodiment of the anti-counterfeit medium of the present invention, and FIG. 24b shows a detailed configuration of the anti-counterfeit structure 1110 shown in FIG. 24c is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ shown in FIG. 24b, and FIG. 24d is a diagram showing a configuration of the recess 1111 provided with the character mark 1112 shown in FIG. 24b. FIG. 24e is a diagram showing the configuration of the recess 1111 provided with the background mark 1113 shown in FIG. 24b.
 本形態の偽造防止シート1101は図24a~図24eに示すように、紙からなるシート基材1102の一部の領域に偽造防止構造1110が設けられて構成されている。シート基材1102は、基材表面となる平面部1103を有し、この平面部1103の一部の領域に情報印刷領域1104が設けられるとともに、他の領域に偽造防止構造1110が設けられている。このように構成された偽造防止シート1101は、例えば、コンサート等の入場チケットとして用いることが考えられる。その場合、コンサートの内容や会場名、座席番号等が情報印刷領域1104に印刷されることになる。また、シート基材1102の情報印刷領域1104に情報が印刷される前に、シート基材1102に対してプレ印刷として地紋を印刷したり所定の色に着色したりすることも考えられるが、その場合、偽造防止構造1110による潜像が見にくくならないようにする必要がある。 The anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 of this embodiment is configured by providing an anti-counterfeit structure 1110 in a partial region of a sheet base material 1102 made of paper, as shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e. The sheet base material 1102 has a flat surface 1103 that becomes the surface of the base material, and an information printing region 1104 is provided in a part of the flat part 1103 and a forgery prevention structure 1110 is provided in another region. . The counterfeit prevention sheet 1101 configured in this manner can be used as an entrance ticket for a concert, for example. In that case, the contents of the concert, the venue name, the seat number, and the like are printed in the information print area 1104. In addition, before the information is printed in the information printing area 1104 of the sheet base material 1102, it may be possible to print a tint block or precolor the sheet base material 1102 as a pre-print. In this case, it is necessary to make it difficult to see the latent image by the forgery prevention structure 1110.
 シート基材1102に設けられた偽造防止構造1110は図24bに示すように、シート基材1102にマトリックス状に形成されたエンボス部である複数の凹部1111と、この複数の凹部1111のうち予め決められた凹部1111のみに設けられた第1のマーク部である文字部マーク1112と、複数の凹部1111のうち文字部マーク1112が設けられていない凹部1111に設けられた第2のマーク部である背景部マーク1113とから構成されている。凹部1111は図24cに示すように、シート基材1102の厚さ方向に平面部1103から0.1mm程度窪み、平面部1103との境界部分が直径0.5mm以下の円形状となっている。この境界部分から離れていくに従ってその断面積が徐々に狭くなり、図24d及び図24eに示すように、境界部分の反対側は平面部1103と平行な底部1111bとなっている。そのため、凹部1111の内側面1111aは、平面部1103の法線に対して斜めの方向を向いている。文字部マーク1112は、複数の凹部1111のうち予め決められた凹部1111の内側面1111aの平面部1103からの深さが第1の深さd1となる位置にて全周に渡って印刷によって設けられており、凹部1111の平面部1103との境界部分が円形状であり、また、この境界部分から離れていくに従って凹部1111の断面積が徐々に狭くなることから、シート基材1102の平面部1103の法線方向から見た場合に円形状となっている。背景部マーク1113は、複数の凹部1111のうち文字部マーク1112が設けられていない凹部1111の内側面11aの平面部3からの深さが第2の深さd2となる位置にて全周に渡って印刷によって設けられており、凹部1111の平面部1103との境界部分が円形状であり、また、この境界部分から離れていくに従って凹部1111の断面積が徐々に狭くなることから、シート基材1102の平面部1103の法線方向から見た場合に円形状となっている。ここで、凹部1111の内側面1111aにて文字部マーク1112が設けられた深さd1と、背景部マーク1113が設けられた深さd2とは、背景部マーク1113が設けられた深さd2が文字部マーク1112が設けられた深さd1よりも深くなっている。なお、本形態にて図示する偽造防止構造1110は、説明を簡単にするために縦横がそれぞれ10個ずつの凹部1111が形成されたものであるが、その数を多くすればするほど、この偽造防止構造1110によって浮き上がらせることができる潜像となる文字を精細なものとすることができ、曲線等を表現しやすくなる。 The anti-counterfeit structure 1110 provided on the sheet base 1102 has a plurality of recesses 1111 which are embossed portions formed in a matrix on the sheet base 1102 and a predetermined one of the plurality of recesses 1111 as shown in FIG. 24b. A character mark 1112 which is a first mark portion provided only in the recessed portion 1111 and a second mark portion provided in a recess 1111 where the character portion mark 1112 is not provided among the plurality of recesses 1111. It consists of a background part mark 1113. As shown in FIG. 24 c, the recess 1111 is recessed by about 0.1 mm from the plane portion 1103 in the thickness direction of the sheet base 1102, and a boundary portion with the plane portion 1103 has a circular shape with a diameter of 0.5 mm or less. As the distance from the boundary portion increases, the cross-sectional area gradually decreases. As shown in FIGS. 24d and 24e, the opposite side of the boundary portion is a bottom portion 1111b parallel to the plane portion 1103. Therefore, the inner side surface 1111 a of the recess 1111 faces an oblique direction with respect to the normal line of the flat portion 1103. Character portion Mark 1112, by printing over the entire circumference in advance inside surface depth from the plane portion 1103 of 1111a of-determined recesses 1111 is the first depth d 1 position of the plurality of recesses 1111 Since the boundary portion between the concave portion 1111 and the flat portion 1103 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the concave portion 1111 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the plane of the sheet base material 1102 is reduced. When viewed from the normal direction of the portion 1103, the shape is circular. Background mark 1113, the entire periphery at the character portion mark 1112 is a depth from the plane portion 3 of the inner surface 11a of the concave portion 1111 is not provided the second depth d 2 position of the plurality of recesses 1111 Since the boundary portion between the concave portion 1111 and the flat portion 1103 is circular, and the cross-sectional area of the concave portion 1111 gradually decreases as the distance from the boundary portion increases, the sheet When viewed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1103 of the substrate 1102, the substrate 1102 has a circular shape. Here, the depth d 1 at which the character portion mark 1112 is provided on the inner surface 1111 a of the recess 1111 and the depth d 2 at which the background portion mark 1113 is provided are the depth at which the background portion mark 1113 is provided. d 2 is deeper than the depth d 1 at which the character mark 1112 is provided. Note that the anti-counterfeit structure 1110 illustrated in this embodiment is formed with ten recesses 1111 in each of the vertical and horizontal directions for the sake of simplicity of explanation. A character that becomes a latent image that can be lifted by the prevention structure 1110 can be made minute, and a curve or the like can be easily expressed.
 以下に、上記のように構成された偽造防止シート1101の製造方法について説明する。 Hereinafter, a method for manufacturing the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 configured as described above will be described.
 図25a及び図25bは、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001の製造方法を説明するための図であり、シート基材1002のうち偽造防止構造1110が設けられる領域のみを示す。 FIGS. 25a and 25b are diagrams for explaining a manufacturing method of the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e, and show only a region of the sheet base material 1002 where the forgery prevention structure 1110 is provided.
 まず、図25aに示すように、シート基材1002の偽造防止構造1110が設けられる領域に、文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113をそれぞれ円形状に印刷する。文字部マーク1112は、凹部1111が設けられる10×10のマトリックス状の領域のうち潜像となる「T」を形成する位置に印刷し、背景部マーク1113は、10×10のマトリックス状の領域のうち文字部マーク1112が印刷されない位置に印刷する。文字部マーク1112と背景部マーク1113とは、互いに相似形であって、その径は、文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113が設けられた領域に凹部1111を形成した際に、上述したように平面部1103からの深さが背景部マーク1113の方が文字部マーク1112よりも深くなるように、文字部マーク1112の径の方が背景部マーク1113の径よりも大きくなっている。これら文字部マーク1112と背景部マーク1113との組み合わせは、偽造防止構造10によって浮かび上がる潜像(本形態においては「T」)に応じて予め設定されており、印刷データとして与えられる。また、これら文字部マーク1112と背景部マーク1113の印刷は、上述したようなプレ印刷と同時に行ってもよいし、上述したプレ印刷を行った後に行ってもよい。 First, as shown in FIG. 25a, the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 are printed in a circular shape in the region where the forgery prevention structure 1110 of the sheet base material 1002 is provided. The character part mark 1112 is printed at a position where a latent image “T” is formed in the 10 × 10 matrix area where the recess 1111 is provided, and the background part mark 1113 is a 10 × 10 matrix area. The character part mark 1112 is printed at a position where it is not printed. The character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are similar to each other, and the diameter thereof is as described above when the concave portion 1111 is formed in the region where the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are provided. The diameter of the character mark 1112 is larger than the diameter of the background mark 1113 so that the background mark 1113 is deeper than the character mark 1112 from the flat surface 1103. The combination of the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 is set in advance according to the latent image (“T” in the present embodiment) that emerges from the forgery prevention structure 10 and is given as print data. The character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 may be printed simultaneously with the pre-printing as described above or after the pre-printing described above.
 次に、図25bに示すように、文字部マーク1112が印刷された領域と背景部マーク1113が印刷された領域とのそれぞれに、エンボス版を用いて複数の凹部1111を形成する。この際、凹部1111は、文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113の外側がそれぞれ平面部1103との境界部分となるように形成され、それにより、文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113はそれぞれ、凹部1111の内側面1111aの全周に渡って設けられた形状となる。 Next, as shown in FIG. 25b, a plurality of recesses 1111 are formed using an embossed plate in each of the area where the character part mark 1112 is printed and the area where the background part mark 1113 is printed. At this time, the concave portion 1111 is formed so that the outer sides of the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are the boundary portions with the plane portion 1103, respectively, so that the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are respectively recessed portions. The shape is provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface 1111 a of 1111.
 上述したようにして偽造防止シート1001が製造され、その後、用途に応じた情報がシート基材1002の情報印刷領域1004に印刷されて使用されることになる。なお、上述した凹部1111の形成については、エンボス版を用いるのではなく、シート基材1002の文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113の内側に透明樹脂を塗布し、この透明樹脂が硬化した後に透明樹脂をシート基材1002に埋め込むことにより凹部1111を形成することも考えられる。 The anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 is manufactured as described above, and then information corresponding to the application is printed on the information printing area 1004 of the sheet base material 1002 and used. In addition, about formation of the recessed part 1111 mentioned above, transparent resin is apply | coated to the inner side of the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 of the sheet | seat base material 1002 instead of using an embossed plate, and after this transparent resin hardens, it is transparent. It is also conceivable to form the recess 1111 by embedding a resin in the sheet base material 1002.
 以下に、上述した偽造防止シート1001の作用について説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the above-described anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 will be described.
 まず、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面、すなわち、シート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向から観察した場合の作用について説明する。 First, the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet base material 1002 will be described.
 図26aは、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図であり、図26bは、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合の偽造防止構造1110における文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 26a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front, and FIG. 26b is shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e. It is a figure which shows the appearance of the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 in the forgery prevention structure 1110 at the time of observing the forgery prevention sheet 1001 from the front.
 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001を、図26aに示すように、正面、すなわち平面部1003の法線方向から観察した場合、複数の凹部1111にそれぞれ設けられた文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113は、観察方向から遮るものが存在しないため、図26bに示すように全ての文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113が視認されることとなる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is observed from the front, that is, from the normal direction of the flat portion 1003, as shown in FIG. 26a, the character mark 1112 provided in each of the plurality of recesses 1111 and Since the background portion mark 1113 does not obstruct the viewing direction, all the character portion marks 1112 and the background portion marks 1113 are visually recognized as shown in FIG. 26b.
 文字部マーク1112と背景部マーク1113とは、凹部1111の内側面1111aにおいて平面部1103からの深さが互いに異なるように設けられているものの、互いに相似形であり、かつ、偽造防止シート1001を正面から観察した場合はその深さ方向にて観察されることとなり、それにより、文字部マーク1112と背景部マーク1113とが略同一の形状として認識され、同一形状のマークが並んで形成されているものとして認識される。これは凹部1111が微細であるほどこれらが略同一の形状として認識されやすくなる。 Although the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 are provided with different depths from the flat part 1103 on the inner surface 1111a of the concave part 1111, they are similar to each other, and the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 When viewed from the front, it will be observed in the depth direction, whereby the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 are recognized as substantially the same shape, and the marks having the same shape are formed side by side. Is recognized as being. As the recess 1111 is finer, these are more easily recognized as substantially the same shape.
 次に、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面、すなわち、シート基材1002の平面部1003の法線方向から変化させていった場合の作用について説明する。 Next, the operation when the observation direction for the anti-counterfeit sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front, that is, the normal direction of the flat portion 1003 of the sheet substrate 1002 will be described.
 図27aは、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1001に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていった場合の作用を説明するための断面方向から見た図であり、図27bは、図27aに示した背景部マーク1113が見えなくなる時の平面部1003に対する観察方向の角度θ1を示す図であり、図27cは、図27bに示した角度θ1にて文字部マーク1112を見た状態を示す図であり、図27d~図27gは、偽造防止構造1110における文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113の見え方を示す図である。 FIG. 27a is a cross-sectional view for explaining the operation when the observation direction for the forgery prevention sheet 1001 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front, and FIG. 27b is a cross-sectional view. state background mark 1113 shown is a diagram showing a viewing direction at an angle theta 1 with respect to the plane portion 1003 when the invisible, FIG 27c is viewed character portion mark 1112 at an angle theta 1 shown in FIG. 27b to FIGS. 27d to 27g are views showing how the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 appear in the forgery prevention structure 1110. FIG.
 図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向を正面から変化させていくと、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度が鋭角になっていく。そして、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度が、図27bに示すように角度θ1よりも小さくなると、凹部1111の内側面1111aに設けられた文字部マーク12及び背景部マーク13のうち背景部マーク13が、その背景部マーク1113が設けられた凹部1111の観察方向側の平面部1103の縁によって隠れて見えなくなる。なお、背景部マーク1113が平面部1103の縁によって隠れて見えなくなる角度θ1は、図27bに示すように、背景部マーク1113と、その背景部マーク1113が設けられた凹部1111の観察方向側の平面部1103の縁との間の平面部1103と平行となる方向についての距離をw1、背景部マーク1113の平面部1103からの深さをt1とすると、角度θ1=tan-1(t1/w1)で表される。 When the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1101 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e is changed from the front, the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 becomes an acute angle. When the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 is smaller than the angle θ 1 as shown in FIG. 27b, the character portion mark 12 and the background portion mark provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 13, the background mark 13 is hidden behind the edge of the flat surface 1103 on the observation direction side of the recess 1111 provided with the background mark 1113. Note that the angle θ 1 at which the background mark 1113 is hidden behind the edge of the flat surface 1103 is invisible in the observation direction side of the background mark 1113 and the recess 1111 provided with the background mark 1113 as shown in FIG. The angle θ 1 = tan −1 where w 1 is the distance in the direction parallel to the plane portion 1103 between the edge of the plane portion 1103 and the depth of the background mark 1113 from the plane portion 1103 is t 1. It is expressed by (t 1 / w 1 ).
 一方、文字部マーク1112においては、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度が、背景部マーク1113が見えなくなる角度θ1となった場合においても、図27cに示すように、その文字部マーク1112が設けられた凹部1111の観察方向側の平面部1103の縁によって隠れない。 On the other hand, in the character part mark 1112, even when the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat part 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 becomes an angle θ 1 at which the background part mark 1113 cannot be seen, as shown in FIG. The concave portion 1111 provided with the character mark 1112 is not hidden by the edge of the flat portion 1103 on the observation direction side.
 そのため、偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向を、例えば図24a中下側に変化させていき、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度がθ1よりも小さくなると、凹部1111の内側面1111aに設けられた文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113のうち文字部マーク1112のみが見えることになり、図27dに示すように、この文字部マーク1112によって構成される潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Therefore, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 is changed to the lower side in FIG. 24A, for example, and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 is smaller than θ 1 , the inner surface of the recess 1111 Of the character mark 1112 and the background mark 1113 provided on 1111a, only the character mark 1112 can be seen. As shown in FIG. 27d, the latent image “T” formed by the character mark 1112 is revealed. It looks up.
 ここで、図24a~図24eに示した偽造防止シート1101においては、観察方向によって浮かび上がる潜像を構成する文字部マーク1112が、シート基材1102に形成された凹部1111の内側面1111aの全周に渡って設けられているため、シート基材1102の平面部1103と観察方向とのなす角度がθ1よりも小さければ、どの方向から観察した場合であっても、文字部マーク1112による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるようになる。例えば、偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向を図24a中上側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク1112によって構成される潜像「T」が図27eに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向を図24a中右側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク1112によって構成される潜像「T」が図27fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになり、また、偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向を図24a中左側に変化させていくと、文字部マーク1112によって構成される潜像「T」が図27fに示すように浮かび上がって見えるようになる。 Here, in the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 shown in FIGS. 24a to 24e, the character mark 1112 constituting the latent image that emerges depending on the viewing direction is formed on the entire inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 formed on the sheet base 1102. Since it is provided over the circumference, as long as the angle formed by the flat surface 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 and the observation direction is smaller than θ 1 , the latent mark 1112 is hidden by the character mark 1112 regardless of the direction of observation. The statue emerges and appears. For example, when the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 is changed to the upper side in FIG. 24a, the latent image “T” constituted by the character mark 1112 appears to appear as shown in FIG. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 is changed to the right side in FIG. 24a, the latent image “T” constituted by the character mark 1112 appears to appear as shown in FIG. 27f. When the observation direction with respect to the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 is changed to the left side in FIG. 24a, the latent image “T” constituted by the character mark 1112 appears to appear as shown in FIG. 27f.
 シート基材1102の平面部1103と観察方向とのなす角度がθ1よりも小さければ、上述したように、凹部1111の内側面1111aに設けられた文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113のうち背景部マーク1113が隠れて見えなくなるが、シート基材1102の平面部1103と観察方向とのなす角度をさらに小さくしていき、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度が、図27cに示すように角度θ2よりも小さくなると、凹部1111の内側面1111aに設けられた文字部マーク1112までもが、その文字部マーク1112が設けられた凹部1111の観察方向側の平面部1103の縁によって隠れて見えなくなってしまう。すなわち、シート基材1102の平面部1103に対する観察方向のなす角度θが、θ2≦θ≦θ1である場合に、凹部1111の内側面1111aに設けられた文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113のうち文字部マーク1112のみが視認可能となることにより潜像「T」が浮かび上がって見えることになる。なお、文字部マーク1112が平面部1103の縁によって隠れて見えなくなる角度θ2は、図27cに示すように、文字部マーク1112と、その文字部マーク1112が設けられた凹部1111の観察方向側の平面部1103の縁との間の平面部1103と平行となる方向についての距離をw2、文字部マーク1112の平面部1103からの深さをt2とすると、角度θ2=tan-1(t2/w2)で表される。 If the angle formed by the flat surface 1103 of the sheet base 1102 and the observation direction is smaller than θ 1, the background of the character portion mark 1112 and the background portion mark 1113 provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 as described above. Although the part mark 1113 is hidden and cannot be seen, the angle formed by the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 and the observation direction is further reduced, and the angle formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base 1102 is as shown in FIG. When the angle θ 2 is smaller than the angle θ 2 , even the character mark 1112 provided on the inner surface 1111a of the recess 1111 extends to the plane portion 1103 on the observation direction side of the recess 1111 provided with the character mark 1112. It is hidden by the edge and disappears. That is, when the angle θ formed by the observation direction with respect to the flat surface 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 is θ 2 ≦ θ ≦ θ 1 , the character part mark 1112 and the background part mark 1113 provided on the inner side surface 1111a of the recess 1111. Among them, only the character part mark 1112 becomes visible, so that the latent image “T” appears to appear. Note that the angle θ 2 at which the character mark 1112 is hidden by the edge of the flat surface 1103 is invisible in the observation direction side of the character mark 1112 and the recess 1111 provided with the character mark 1112 as shown in FIG. Angle θ 2 = tan −1 where w 2 is the distance in the direction parallel to the plane portion 1103 between the edges of the plane portion 1103 and t 2 is the depth of the character portion mark 1112 from the plane portion 1103. It is represented by (t 2 / w 2 ).
 上述した偽造防止シート1101は、複写した場合、シート基材1102の情報印刷領域1104に印刷された情報や、シート基材1102に印刷により設けられた文字部マーク1112及び背景部マーク1113は複写されるものの、凹部1111までは再現できない。そのため、複写物の観察方向を変えていった場合であっても、文字部マーク1112による潜像は浮かび上がらず、それにより、真偽判別を行うことが可能となる。このように真偽判別を行う際、本形態の偽造防止シート1101においては、偽造防止シート1101に対する観察方向をシート基材1102の平面部1103の法線方向からどの方向に変化させていった場合であっても、文字部マーク1112による潜像が浮かび上がって見えるため、観察方向に制限されることなく潜像による真偽判別を容易に行うことができる。 When the anti-counterfeit sheet 1101 described above is copied, the information printed in the information printing area 1104 of the sheet base 1102 and the character mark 1112 and the background mark 1113 provided by printing on the sheet base 1102 are copied. However, the concave portion 1111 cannot be reproduced. For this reason, even if the observation direction of the copy is changed, the latent image by the character mark 1112 does not appear, thereby making it possible to determine authenticity. When the authenticity determination is performed in this way, in the forgery prevention sheet 1101 of the present embodiment, when the observation direction with respect to the forgery prevention sheet 1101 is changed from the normal direction of the flat portion 1103 of the sheet base material 1102 to which direction Even so, since the latent image by the character mark 1112 appears to emerge, the authenticity determination by the latent image can be easily performed without being limited to the observation direction.
 なお、上述した実施の形態における凸部の平面部からの高さあるいは凹部の平面部深さや、平面部との境界部分の寸法については、上述したものに限らず、適宜設定が可能である。 It should be noted that the height from the flat portion of the convex portion or the depth of the flat portion of the concave portion and the dimension of the boundary portion with the flat portion in the embodiment described above are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.
 また、凸部や凹部においては、円柱形のものや頂部がない円錐形のものやドーム型のものとすることも考えられる。また、断面が矩形状となるものとすることも考えられる。 Also, it is conceivable that the convex part and the concave part have a cylindrical shape, a conical shape without a top portion, or a dome shape. It is also conceivable that the cross section is rectangular.
 また、潜像となる情報は、上述した「T」のように複数の凸部や凹部が行及び列を構成したものに限らず、複数の凸部や凹部が行のみを構成しただけ、あるいは列のみを構成しただけのものであってもよい。また、一文字からなるものに限らず、複数の文字からなるものや模様等であってもよい。また、潜像を表現する複数の凸部を複数の領域に分割し、その複数の領域毎に文字等が浮かび上がる構成とすることも考えられる。また、潜像の周囲となる複数の凸部や凹部が、潜像を表現する複数の凸部や凹部が形成された領域を完全に取り囲むのではなく、一部が開放されるようにして、潜像の周囲となる複数の凸部や凹部が、潜像を表現する複数の凸部が形成された領域を囲むような形状であってもよい。 In addition, the information that becomes a latent image is not limited to a plurality of convex portions and concave portions that form rows and columns as in the above-described “T”, but a plurality of convex portions and concave portions only form rows, or It may be configured only in columns. Moreover, it is not limited to one consisting of a single character, but may be one consisting of a plurality of characters or a pattern. It is also conceivable to divide a plurality of convex portions representing a latent image into a plurality of regions and to make characters and the like appear in each of the plurality of regions. In addition, the plurality of protrusions and recesses around the latent image do not completely surround the area where the plurality of protrusions and recesses representing the latent image are formed, but a part thereof is opened, The plurality of convex portions and concave portions around the latent image may have a shape surrounding a region where the plurality of convex portions expressing the latent image are formed.
 また、上述した実施の形態においては、複数の凸部や凹部が複数の周期配色領域やマーク部等の配列方向と並行して行及び列を構成しているが、複数の凸部や凹部が構成する行及び列の方向が、複数の周期配色領域やマーク部等の配列方向に対して若干の角度を有するものであってもよい。 In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of convex portions and concave portions constitute rows and columns in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of periodic coloration regions and mark portions. The direction of the row and the column to be configured may have a slight angle with respect to the arrangement direction of a plurality of periodic coloration regions, mark portions, and the like.
 また、上述した実施の形態においては、偽造防止媒体として、紙からなるシート基材に偽造防止構造が設けられた偽造防止シートを例に挙げて説明したが、本発明はこのような偽造防止シートに限らず、フィルムからなるシート基材や複数の樹脂層が積層されてなるカード基材に上述したような偽造防止構造を設けたものにも適用することが可能である。 In the above-described embodiment, the anti-counterfeit sheet has been described as an example of the anti-counterfeit sheet provided with the anti-counterfeit structure on the sheet base material made of paper. However, the present invention can be applied to a sheet base material made of a film or a card base material in which a plurality of resin layers are laminated and provided with a forgery prevention structure as described above.

Claims (9)

  1.  第1及び第2の配色部を組み合わせて所定の配列に並べてなる表示部と、
     前記第1及び第2の配色部に全部または一部が重なるように前記表示部上に所定の配列に並べられて設けられたエンボス部とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    A display unit configured by combining the first and second color arrangement units and arranging them in a predetermined arrangement;
    An anti-counterfeit medium having an embossed portion arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the display portion so that all or part of the first and second color arrangement portions overlap.
  2.  所定の配列に並べられた複数のエンボス部と、
     前記エンボス部の側面または前記エンボス部の間に設けられた配色部とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    A plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement;
    An anti-counterfeit medium having a side surface of the embossed part or a color arrangement part provided between the embossed parts.
  3.  所定の配列に並べられた複数のエンボス部と、
     前記エンボス部の側面または頂点領域の周辺全周に渡って設けられた配色部とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    A plurality of embossed portions arranged in a predetermined arrangement;
    An anti-counterfeit medium having a color arrangement portion provided over a side surface of the embossed portion or the entire periphery of the apex region.
  4.  請求項1に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記第1の配色部は、基材表面に設けられ、
     前記第2の配色部は、前記第1の配色部とは異なる色を具備し、前記第1の配色部上に行及び/または列を構成して一定周期で設けられ、
     前記エンボス部は、
     前記第1の配色部の所定領域に、前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、前記基材表面に平行な任意の中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで前記第1の配色部と前記第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なるように前記一定周期で形成された複数の第1の凸部と、
     前記第1の配色部における前記所定領域以外の領域に、前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行し、かつ、前記複数の第1の凸部の行及び/または列に対してずれた行及び/または列を構成し、前記中心線と平行な中心線にて分離される2つの領域のそれぞれで前記第1の配色部と前記第2の配色部との面積が互いに異なり、かつ、該面積の大小関係が、前記第1の凸部における前記中心線を介した同一方向側の領域に対して逆転するように前記一定周期で形成された複数の第2の凸部とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 1,
    The first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate,
    The second color arrangement unit has a color different from that of the first color arrangement unit, and is provided on the first color arrangement unit at regular intervals by configuring rows and / or columns,
    The embossed part is
    In a predetermined area of the first color arrangement portion, rows and / or columns are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and separated by an arbitrary center line parallel to the substrate surface. A plurality of first convex portions formed at the predetermined period so that the areas of the first color arrangement portion and the second color arrangement portion are different from each other in each of the two regions,
    In a region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion, parallel to the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions and shifted with respect to the rows and / or columns of the plurality of first convex portions. The areas of the first color arrangement part and the second color arrangement part are different from each other in each of the two regions separated by a center line parallel to the center line, and And a plurality of second convex portions formed at the predetermined period so that the magnitude relationship of the areas is reversed with respect to the region on the same direction side through the center line in the first convex portion. Anti-counterfeit medium.
  5.  請求項1に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記第1の配色部は、基材表面に設けられ、
     前記第2の配色部は、前記第1の配色部上にて該第1の配色部とは異なる色を有してマトリックス状に設けられ、
     前記エンボス部は、
     前記第1の配色部の所定領域にて前記複数の第2の配色部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、前記第1の配色部の色が頂部にて表出するように前記基材表面から突出して形成された複数の凸部からなる第1の凸部群と、
     前記第1の配色部における前記所定領域以外の領域にて前記第1の凸部群を構成する複数の凸部の配列方向と並行して行及び/または列を構成し、頂部が当該第2の配色部を含むように前記基材表面から突出して形成された複数の凸部からなる第2の凸部群とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 1,
    The first color arrangement portion is provided on the surface of the substrate,
    The second color arrangement portion is provided in a matrix shape having a color different from the first color arrangement portion on the first color arrangement portion,
    The embossed part is
    A row and / or a column is formed in a predetermined region of the first color arrangement portion in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of second color arrangement portions, and the color of the first color arrangement portion is expressed at the top. A first convex group consisting of a plurality of convex parts formed so as to protrude from the substrate surface,
    In the region other than the predetermined region in the first color arrangement portion, a row and / or a column are formed in parallel with the arrangement direction of the plurality of convex portions constituting the first convex portion group, and the top portion is the second portion. A forgery-preventing medium having a second group of convex portions formed of a plurality of convex portions formed so as to protrude from the surface of the base material so as to include the color arrangement portion.
  6.  請求項2に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記エンボス部は、平面部を具備する基材に、該平面部の法線方向に突出して形成された複数の凸部からなり、
     前記配色部は、
     前記複数の凸部毎に、当該凸部を取り囲むように前記平面部に設けられた複数の第1のマーク部と、
     前記複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられた第2のマーク部とを有する偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 2,
    The embossed portion comprises a plurality of convex portions formed on a base material having a flat portion so as to protrude in the normal direction of the flat portion,
    The color scheme is
    For each of the plurality of convex portions, a plurality of first mark portions provided on the planar portion so as to surround the convex portion,
    An anti-counterfeit medium having a second mark portion provided over the entire circumference of a side surface of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions.
  7.  請求項3に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記エンボス部は、基材表面から突出し、マトリックス状に形成された複数の凸部からなり、
     前記配色部は、
     前記複数の凸部のうち予め決められた凸部の前記基材表面から第1の高さとなる位置に設けられた第1のマーク部と、
     前記複数の凸部のうち前記第1のマーク部が設けられていない凸部の前記基材表面から前記第1の高さと異なる第2の高さとなる位置に設けられた第2のマーク部とを有し、
     前記第1のマーク部と前記第2のマーク部とは、相似形であり、少なくとも一方が前記凸部の側面の全周に渡って設けられた偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 3,
    The embossed portion protrudes from the surface of the base material and consists of a plurality of convex portions formed in a matrix shape,
    The color scheme is
    A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first height from the surface of the base material of a predetermined convex portion among the plurality of convex portions;
    A second mark portion provided at a position having a second height different from the first height from the surface of the base material of the convex portion not provided with the first mark portion among the plurality of convex portions; Have
    The first mark portion and the second mark portion are similar in shape, and at least one is a forgery prevention medium provided over the entire circumference of the side surface of the convex portion.
  8.  請求項3に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記エンボス部は、基材に側面を具備して形成された複数の凸部からなる第1及び第2の凸部群を有し、
     前記第1の凸部群を構成する凸部と、前記第2の凸部群を構成する凸部とは、同一方向から観察した場合における前記側面の前記配色部による配色割合が互いに異なる偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 3,
    The embossed portion has a first and second convex group consisting of a plurality of convex portions formed with a side surface on a base material,
    Forgery prevention in which the convex portions constituting the first convex portion group and the convex portions constituting the second convex portion group have different coloration ratios due to the color arrangement portions on the side surfaces when observed from the same direction. Medium.
  9.  請求項3に記載の偽造防止媒体において、
     前記エンボス部は、基材表面から窪んで形成された複数の凹部からなり、
     前記配色部は、
     前記複数の凹部のうち予め決められた凹部の前記基材表面から第1の深さとなる位置に設けられた第1のマーク部と、
     前記第1のマーク部と相似形であり、前記複数の凹部のうち前記第1のマーク部が設けられていない凹部の前記基材表面から前記第1の深さと異なる第2の深さとなる位置に設けられた第2のマーク部とを有し、
     前記第1のマーク部と前記第2のマーク部との少なくとも一方は、前記凹部の内側面の全周に渡って設けられた偽造防止媒体。
    In the anti-counterfeit medium according to claim 3,
    The embossed portion is composed of a plurality of recesses formed to be recessed from the substrate surface,
    The color scheme is
    A first mark portion provided at a position that is a first depth from the surface of the base material of a predetermined recess among the plurality of recesses;
    A position that is similar to the first mark portion and has a second depth different from the first depth from the surface of the base material of the concave portion in which the first mark portion is not provided among the plurality of concave portions. And a second mark portion provided in the
    At least one of the first mark portion and the second mark portion is a forgery prevention medium provided over the entire circumference of the inner surface of the recess.
PCT/JP2007/074544 2007-12-20 2007-12-20 Anticounterfeit medium WO2009081461A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2007/074544 WO2009081461A1 (en) 2007-12-20 2007-12-20 Anticounterfeit medium
CN2007801019380A CN101896362B (en) 2007-12-20 2007-12-20 Anticounterfeit medium
HK10112276.8A HK1146019A1 (en) 2007-12-20 2010-12-30 Anticounterfeit medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2007/074544 WO2009081461A1 (en) 2007-12-20 2007-12-20 Anticounterfeit medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009081461A1 true WO2009081461A1 (en) 2009-07-02

Family

ID=40800780

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2007/074544 WO2009081461A1 (en) 2007-12-20 2007-12-20 Anticounterfeit medium

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CN (1) CN101896362B (en)
HK (1) HK1146019A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2009081461A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013045056A1 (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-04-04 Giesecke & Devrient Gmbh Security element comprising a plurality of optically variable structures and a kinematic effect

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003015528A (en) * 2001-06-28 2003-01-17 Mint Bureau Ministry Of Finance Image display structure
JP2004202951A (en) * 2002-12-26 2004-07-22 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Image forming body having latent image
JP2006224476A (en) * 2005-02-18 2006-08-31 National Printing Bureau Genuineness determinable formed object

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003015528A (en) * 2001-06-28 2003-01-17 Mint Bureau Ministry Of Finance Image display structure
JP2004202951A (en) * 2002-12-26 2004-07-22 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Image forming body having latent image
JP2006224476A (en) * 2005-02-18 2006-08-31 National Printing Bureau Genuineness determinable formed object

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013045056A1 (en) * 2011-09-30 2013-04-04 Giesecke & Devrient Gmbh Security element comprising a plurality of optically variable structures and a kinematic effect

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN101896362B (en) 2012-08-08
HK1146019A1 (en) 2011-05-13
CN101896362A (en) 2010-11-24

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2007168341A (en) Image forming body
JP4832192B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP2005205897A (en) Forgery-proof form
JP4840919B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4832333B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4832329B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
WO2009081461A1 (en) Anticounterfeit medium
JP5069519B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP5033538B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4871109B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP2008105238A (en) Forgeryproof printed matter
JP4708275B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4832330B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4832190B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP5570230B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4832191B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4734615B2 (en) Special latent image pattern former
JP5022890B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4997093B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4940019B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP5060456B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4997092B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP5060455B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP4822522B2 (en) Anti-counterfeit media
JP7010203B2 (en) Latent image forming body

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200780101938.0

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 07850978

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 07850978

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1